Home

StorageTek SL500 User`s Guide

1. Partitions SE Partition Cell Drive CAP Cartridge of Cells v Partition ID g A Name Count Count Count Count with Media 1 PARTITION 1 27 1 2 2 3 7 2 2Twa 18 1 0 0 0 3 3Three 0 0 0 0 0 4 Green27 Partit 0 0 0 0 0 6 sixer 28 1 2 1 3 57 7Seven 0 0 a a 0 8 Green27 Part 0 0 a Host Connections v Initiator WWWPN Library Controller Port LUN Partition ID 20 00 00 A0 BD 08 07 00 0 0 3 20 00 00 A0 BD 08 0A 00 jo 0 3 20 00 00 A0 BD 08 0A 00 lo 2 1 20 00 00 40 BD 08 04 00 lo 3 4 Print Save To File Description Displays detailed information about all host partition connections for the library Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Optionally you can print the screen data or save it to a comma separated file 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 179 Partition Report Screens Screen Fields Partitions Note The screen fields in this section also appear on the Partitions Reports Part
2. Tools Help Reports Search Update Save Statistics Statistics Drive Mapping Current Drive Mapping Current v Drive Slot Change Date Drive Address Serial Number i Drive Mapping History 1 11 4 09 4 01AM 1 1 1 9 1310000814 a B Media Drive Events 2 1114109 4 01AM 1 1 2 9 HU172102T2 3 1114109 4 01 AM 3 3 1 9 1300001504 gt E Log 4 1114109 4 01 AM 3 3 2 9 RB0527AMC05196 gt cJ Status Summary 5 1114109 4 01 AM 3 3 3 9 1210009115 C Status Detail cf version C Drive Distribution C Drive Utilization C Library Utilization 4 4 gt Screen Fields Drive Slot Display only Drive slot number Slots are numbered 1 5 from top to bottom of the rack Change Date Display only 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 223 Drive Management Tasks Date and time of the most current mapping assignment Drive Address Display only Library internal address of the drive slot Format is m r c where a l for non partitioned libraries this is the library ID always 0 for partitioned libraries this is the partition ID 1 8 m module number 1 5 from top to bottom of the rack a r drive row number 1 2 Base Module or 1 4 Drive Expansion Module from top to bottom of the module c column number always 9 for drives Serial Number Display only Serial number of the drive cur
3. 96116 Revision KB Chapter 7 CAP Management 215 CAP Management Tasks 216 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 8 Drive Management You can install up to 18 drives within one library as follows Up to two in the Base Module Up to four in each Drive Expansion Module DEM with a total of four DEMs possible Drive Identification The library uses the following addressing schemes for each library drive m Library internal address For all drives Assigned by the library controller based on the library rail column side and row location of the drive m Host SCSI element address For FC SCSI host connections only Assigned by host applications m Drive bay address For all drives Assigned by the library controller based on the physical slot in which the drive is installed Drive States A drive can be in either of the following states m Online The drive is available for read write operations m Offline The drive is not available for read write operations 96116 Revision KB 217 Drive Management Tasks Drive Management Tasks Task Page Display Drive Summary Information 219 Display Drive Status 220 Display Drive Properties 22l Enable or Disable a Drive Port 222 Display Current Drive Mappings 223 Display Drive Mapping History 225 Display the Media Drive Events Report 227 Display the Drive Distribution Reports 229 Display the Drive Ut
4. EventLog Error Generated on Thu Feb 28 13 13 30 MST 2008 SLConsole Search Results xi Time 2007 1 2 21708 22 24 528 Device Address 1 1 0 2 0 User root Requester Activity internal Request ld 0 Level error Result Code 3333 Text Dropped unexpected device response Parameters Data lt response sequence 57 320 occurrences of default found Time 2007 1 2 21708 22 24 575 Device Address 1 1 0 2 0 User root Requester Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 59 General SL Console Report Tasks v Save Library Report Data to a File Use this procedure to display a library report and save the data to a file This procedure can be performed from any of the library report screens 1 Once the file is saved you can print it or include it in e mail This may be useful for communicating about library issues with your Oracle support representative Select Tools gt Reports The reports Display screen appears All library report options are listed in the navigation bar Tools Help Reports C Statistics gt cI Log c Status Summary o c Status Detail o c version C Drive Distribution C Drive Interval Utilization Display 2 In the navigation bar expand a report category to see the report options 3 Click the report you want to display The specified report is displayed All report screens include the Save button on the Opti
5. Tools Help User Mgmt User Management gt BE Permanent 228 custom 3 On the User tree expand the Permanent folder and click the user account you want to modify the user account you are logged in as Detailed information for the user account is displayed Tools Help User Mgmt Modify User Management 9 QE Permanent admin adysrv User Name admin eng mfg Current Password nobody New Password oem remote Retype Password root Current Permission serice test ViewAndModifySecurity 2 C ExecuteDisruptiveutilities ustom KaR ExecuteSafeUtilities ModifyStatistics ModifyProperties ViewDiagnosticData VmeDisruptiveDiagnostics VmeSafeDiagnostics 4 Complete the following fields Current Password New Password and Retype Password 5 Click Modify The password for the account is updated 54 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Report Tasks General SL Console Report Tasks Task Page Display a Library Report 56 Search a Library Report 58 Save Library Report Data to a File 60 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 55 General SL Console Report Tasks v Display a Library Report Use this procedure to display library reports available from the Tools gt Reports menu Note All report output is a static display of information sent from the library controller at the time the report is generated The SL Console does not update th
6. Maximum Number of Tape Drives P Total of CAP Storage Modules 2 6 10 14 18 Cells Cells Base module 30 5 35 20 cartridge upgrade key 50 5 55 Adding 1 expansion module Base module plus 1 limited DEM 100 15 115 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 5 Library with LTO Storage Cells TABLE 1 1 LTO Storage Cell and Tape Drive Capacities Number of Tape Total of CAP Storage Modules 2 6 10 14 18 Cells Cells Base module plus 1 full DEM 143 15 158 with 50 cartridge upgrade key Base module plus 1 CEM 170 15 185 Adding 2 expansion modules Base module plus 2 DEMs 227 25 252 Base module plus 1 DEM 1 CEM 254 25 279 Base module plus 2 CEMs 290 25 315 Adding 3 expansion modules Base module plus 3 DEMs 311 35 346 Base module plus 2 DEMs 1 CEM 338 35 373 Base module plus 1 DEM 2 CEMs 374 35 409 Base module plus 3 CEM 410 35 445 Adding 4 expansion modules Base module plus 4 DEMs 395 45 440 Base module plus 3 DEMs 1 CEM 422 45 467 Base module plus 2 DEMs 2 458 45 503 CEMs Base module plus 1 DEM 3 CEMs 494 45 539 Base module plus 4 CEMs 530 45 575 Adding LTO Storage Cell Capacity If your needs have increased you can increase the storage cell capacity and the number of tape drives in the library TABLE 1 1 lists how many storage cells and tape drives can be gained by adding each Drive Expans
7. Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition summary Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated Storage Gaile EFE Number Storage Cells Drives CAP Cells Drives 8 71 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125 Drives 4 CAP cells 12 Resources Unallocated Storage Cells 224 Add Partition Drives 4 g CAP cells 24 Name Partition 1 Barcode Presentation Left 6 label characters Default Connections Initiator WWWYPN 20 00 00 40 BD 08 04 00 Add Connection Delete Connection Modify Connection 2 lick Add Connection Note Each initiator connected to the library must have one library partition assigned to LUN 0 When you verify or commit partition configuration changes the SL Console will notify you if an initiator does not meet this requirement 3 Click OK 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 111 Partition Configuration Tasks v Design a Partition Use this procedure to add or remove library resources storage cells tape drives and CAP cells from a partition Note Library resources can be allocated to only one partition at a time If you want to add resources to a partition but the resources are already allocated to another partition you must first remove the resources from the assigned partition and then ad
8. DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RcvrMove TransferFile Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Mode Non Disruptive v Diagnostic Console 3 In the Mode pull down select Disruptive Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelfTest RcwMove TransterFile gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Mode a aa sicekahett Disruptive Diagnostic Console 4 Click Run A popup appears for you to confirm that the library will be taken offline to all hosts SLConsole x A In order to run any of the disruptive tests the library must first be placed offline This ensures that it is inaccessible to user client operations Do you want to run disruptive diagnostics 5 Click OK to begin the test 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 293 Library Utility Tasks The test begins and the Diagnostic Console section of the screen displays the status of the various diagnostic tests as they are performed Tools Help Diagnostics Run gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 i Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Diagnostic Console Diagnostic started Diagnostic started
9. 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 57 General SL Console Report Tasks v Search a Library Report Use this procedure to search a library report for a specified text string This procedure can be performed on any of the library report screens 1 Select Tools gt Reports The reports Display screen appears All library report options are listed in the navigation bar Tools Help Reports o Statistics gt cI Log gt c Status Summary gt J Status Detail gt 4 version C Drive Distribution C Drive Interval Utilization Display 2 In the navigation bar expand a report category to see the report options 3 Click the report you want to display The specified report is displayed All report screens include the Search button on the Options Bar Tools Help Reports Search Update Save gt E Statistics Display gt GE Log CAP Details c Status Summary c Status Detail Generated on Fri Oct 30 11 10 02 MDT 2009 C car Details O Drive Details O Library Details C Robot Details Device CAP Properties c version Device Id gt 4 Drive Distribution ERRE 9 Drive Interval Utilization Size 12 Device CAP Status 4 Click Search The Search Text popup appears SLConsole Search Text xj Search Text Search Cancel Clear Results 5 Enter the text string you want to se
10. SNMPv3 both read and write support transmitted information is secure SNMP configuration requirements include m SL500 library firmware must be version 1067 or higher m SL Console software must be version FRS_2 95 or higher Trap Levels SNMP traps provide data that are a source of log entries containing Severity indications such as error or warning Result codes such as 0000 success or 5010 robotic posn error Activity string such as HLI move or CLI version print A descriptive text string Date and time Other information might include a Device address associated with the event nua a User name associated with the activity such as HLI host advsrv a The interface specific request identifier such as HL1000001 Trap levels are generally filtered to include only those traps that you wish to monitor These levels are specified when entering the trap information 96116 Revision KB 327 Port Control Trap or notification levels available at this time are listed in the table below Trap Level Number Description Error 1 Error System Log entries Errors critical to library operation For example Device inoperable refers to the entire system Failure of a redundant component is not a Category 1 Warning 2 Warning Log entries Conditions that require attention For example Device degraded Refers to recoverable failures that may allow the system to rem
11. Select the Library folder from the device tree Select SNMP gt Add Trap Recipient and enter the following details Host TrapLevel Version Community v2c only TrapName v3 only Auth v3 only AuthPass v3 only Priv v3 only PrivPass v3 only EngineID v3 only Click Apply Server name where the SNMP software application resides See Trap Levels on page 327 for details Version of the SNMP standard The SL500 library supports m SNMPv2c of the simple network management protocol for machine status queries With this version any information transmitted is not secure SNMPv3 of the simple network management protocol is reserved for proprietary information Because this version supports encryption and stronger user identification it is the preferred protocol for proprietary data Agent community string When set to public requests coming from any community string will be accepted Name of the trap recipient Authentication protocol type MD5 or SHA string for users and hosts receiving traps One of the two primary SNMPv3 security protocols designed to reliably identify the integrity of the originating party Authentication password of the user Privacy protocol type DES or AES The other two primary SNMPv3 security protocols are designed to protect information within the message from disclosure Encryption Password that is the private key for encryption Engine Id is an administ
12. 272 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Firmware Upgrades Library Firmware UPgrades Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1022 The library firmware resides on the library controller The initial firmware is installed at the factory When new firmware is released you must use the code load utility to upgrade the firmware on the library and associated devices CAP and Robot Note Library firmware does not contain drive code upgrades Firmware Upgrade Process The process for loading firmware code on the library controller is as follows 1 Locate the firmware upgrade package img file on the Oracle download site See Firmware Download Site on page 273 2 Download the code to a folder on your local PC or workstation 3 Download the firmware package from your PC or workstation to the library controller This process also unpacks the package after downloading to make it ready for activation See Download Code to the Library Controller on page 298 4 Activate the downloaded code on the library controller See Activate Code on the Library Controller on page 300 5 Reboot the library to make the code operational See Reboot the Library on page 296 Firmware Download Site The SL500 library firmware package is a img image file The file is available at the following download site http www sun com download index jsp
13. Library 1 0 0 0 po CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 ImportiExport Assign CAP Button car 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 7 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Import cleaning diagnostic cartridges Operation Export all cleaning diagnostic cartridges Export expired cleaning cartridges Import Export Console 3 Do one of the following To export only the expired cleaning or diagnostic cartridges select the Export expired cleaning diagnostic cartridges option m To export all cartridges from the reserved cells that include the cleaning and diagnostic cartridges select the Export all cleaning diagnostic cartridges option 4 Select the Start button from the upper right corner of the screen If you selected the Export expired cleaning diagnostic cartridges option the Robot systematically moves all expired cleaning and diagnostic cartridges from the reserved cells into empty CAP cells If you selected the Export all cleaning diagnostic cartridges option the Robot moves all cleaning and diagnostic cartridges from the reserved cells into empty CAP cells 5 The library controller opens the CAP and the CAP Open LED turns on 6 Grip the handle of the magazine and slide it out of the CAP and onto the door 258 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Cleaning Tasks Note To help slide the magazine back into the CAP do not rem
14. Note You must have a valid login ID and password for the download site you are using Contact your Oracle support representative for assistance Multiple Versions of Firmware You can store up to two versions of the SL500 firmware in the library controller flash memory This provides the following advantages 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 273 Library Firmware Upgrades m It allows the library to continue normal operations running one version of firmware while you download and unpack an upgrade package Then you can activate the upgrade at a time that is convenient for library users m It allows you to revert to a previous version of firmware without having to download and unpack the code package again Related Procedures For detailed firmware upgrade procedures see Library Utility Tasks on page 289 274 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Audits Audits An audit is the Process of reading and cataloging cartridges within a library verifying the locations of cartridges or validating a range of slot locations The library controller maintains a cartridge database that contains the following information for all the cartridges in the library a Volume ID VOLID or volser m Current location in library internal address format m Verified status true or false The library audits all cartridge locations in the storage and reserved areas at the fol
15. 5 Browse to the directory where you want to save the file In the File Name field enter the file name and click Save All event data is spooled to the specified file 6 To stop spooling select Monitor gt Stop Spooling Tools Help Monitors Window Open Monitors C4 Permanent Monitors All Events Ly Error Events ee Information Events f Bi Warning Events i Device ID 2008 05 29T11 38 57 415 0 1 0 0 2008 05 29T11 39 12 695 0 1 0 0 gt Spooling Status true Spooling File AllEvents txt Following is a sample of the spool file 2008 05 29T11 23 27 448 0 1 0 0 root default internal 281 warn 0 rb _Reboot reboot Resetting drive 0 3 4 9 2008 05 29T11 23 27 760 0 1 0 0 root default internal 281 info 0 Service Beacon is ACTIVE Current Health Event indicates Drive 04 in Module 03 is not operational 2008 05 29T11 23 53 211 0 1 0 0 root default internal 281 info 0 Service Beacon is ACTIVE Current Health Event indicates Drive 04 in Module 03 is operational 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 287 Event Monitor Tasks v Display Multiple Monitors You can open and manage multiple event monitors using these selections from the Options Bar To Select Custom arrange the open monitors on screen Window gt Arrange Arrange the event monitor windows horizontally Window gt Tile Horizontal Arrange the event monitor windows vertically Windo
16. A Entire Library will be audited in background This may take many minutes Do you want to continue 5 Click OK to perform the audit as a background process or Cancel to cancel the audit Note Once you click OK you cannot stop the audit it will run until completion 6 You can view the Cartridge Summary report after a few hours for the latest cartridge locations and VOLIDs See Display a Library Report on page 56 for details 304 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Audit Tasks v Audit a Range of Cells During this audit the Robot visits only a specific range of storage cells including the cap and drives and updates the library controller database 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot VA Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RewMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Monitor Sequence Monitor Console 3 Click the Audit tab The Library Audit screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Audit Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library ___ Audit Selffest RewMove TransferFile gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 DiagMove LoadCode Activ
17. Description Allows you to confirm that you want to delete the specified partition All information for the partition including host partition connections partition boundaries and partition ID are deleted from the SL Console partition workspace This screen is a popup that appears when you click Delete Partition on the Partitions Summary Step 2 Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields None Buttons OK Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings and return to the previous screen Note Clicking this button does not update the library controller database Cancel Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 156 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Partition Sample Screen xl Modify Partition 1 Name Partition1 Barcode Presentation Right 6 label characters OK
18. Displays detailed information about all library resources storage cells tape drives and CAP cells and any stored cartridges Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens Note You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Optionally you can print the screen data or save it to a comma separated file 176 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Screen Fields Module Display only Module number where the library resource is located Row Display only Row number where the library resource is located Rows are numbered consecutively from the top down with row 1 at the top Column Display only Column number where the library resource is located Column location is referenced from the center of the drive bays 1 is to the right of the drive bays 1 is to the left Cell Status Display only Partition status of the library resource Options are a Assigned a Unassigned Partition ID Display only Partition ID to which the library resource is allocated if applicable Partition Name Display only Name of the
19. Home REFREsh_ Loc our HELP User admin Server C1 4 ent Pending gt Sun Java System Web Server Java Sun Microsystems Inv Configurations gt C129684louisville stortek com gt Virtual Servers gt C129684 louisville stortek com e Web Application Properties Saved Successfully C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server Web Applications This page lets you add web applications to the virtual server Web applications are added as web archive war files After adding the web application you need to deploy the configuration to propagate the added web applications to the instances The page also allows you to set single signon properties x Single Signon x Web Applications Single Signon Single Signon Enabled Session Idle Timeout 300 seconds 0 001 3600 Timeout after which user s single sign on records becomes eligible for purging if no activity is seen Use 1 for no timeout 2 Backto top Web Applications LNew Enable I Disable Update Delete URI Enabled Deployed Path Description I opel true Aweb app C129684 louisville stortek com opel 7 On the Configuration Deployment screen click Deploy Sun Java System Web Server Configuration Deployment Deploying configuration to all instances A Deployment Pending The configuration C129684 louisville stortek com has changed locally Click on Deploy to
20. Note After you complete this procedure all uncommitted partition changes you have made during this SL Console login session are discarded 1 Select Tools gt Partitions 2 Click one of the following tabs Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 The selected screen appears Tools Help Partitions Verify Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports PR Left Side Wall Rear Side Wall Right Side Vall Partition 1 Select by Cell v Base Module1 LTO 3 In the Options Bar click Refresh The Partition Refresh popup appears xi A WARNING If you proceed all partition changes will be lost Would you like to continue Yes No 4 Click Yes to confirm the refresh All partition screen data is updated with current data from the library controller database 126 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Management Tasks v Reallocate Library Resources Reallocating library resources storage cells tape drives CAP cells or cartridges from one partition to another is done through the following screen a Partitions Design Step 3 on page 160 for Base Drive and CEM modules You must use the following two step process 1 Remove the resource from the partition it is currently allocated to 2 Allocate the resource to a different partition See Design
21. SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications Wall diagrams and library specifications previously included in Chapter 1 General Information have been moved to this appendix Appendix B Cartridge Information Moved from previous Chapter 6 Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server previously Appendix B No substantive changes Glossary Updated Index Updated Summary of Changes xxi EC000258 February 2008 K Added information regarding the Library Partitioning feature m Chapter 1 General Information Summary of library partitioning m Chapter 5 Library Partitioning Detailed descriptions of the concepts tasks and SL Console screens involved in library partitioning Added information regarding the Web launched SL Console feature m Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console Detailed instructions for installing and using the Web launched SL Console client m Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server Detailed instructions for installing and managing the Web launched SL Console server 114192 May 2007 J Chapters 1 and 6 Added information regarding Quantum DLT S4 drives media and LTO Gen 4 drives media Library firmware must be version 1126 or later for support of these drives Appendix A see Customer initiated Maintenance on page 335 m Revised Sun Support telephone numbers for U S and Canada m Added Web link to obtain telephone numbers for international
22. Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step2 Design Step 3 Commit Step4 Reports Please select a report to display v Description Allows you to select one of the following library partition reports m Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Host Connections Summary Orphaned Cartridge Report Partition Details Partition Summary Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens 174 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Screen Fields Please select a report to display Required Click the report you want to display The drop down menu lists all available library partition reports Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the library controller database All uncommitted partition changes you have made during this SL Console login session will be discarded The Partition Refresh popup appears prompting you to confirm the refresh Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also Partitions Summary Step 2 Partitions Design Step 3 Partitions Commi
23. cap 11 520 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0 a v Power Supply Folder 1 0 0 0 Audit Reboot Library Load Code Entire Library DiagMove Activate Code Physical Audit Yes Verified Audit No Yes No Start Address End Address Type Type Library Library Rail Audit Console 4 In the Entire Library field click No In the Physical Audit field click No In the Verified Audit field click Yes 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 307 Audit Tasks 5 In the Start Address and End Address fields select the device types you want to audit and the starting and ending library internal address locations 6 Click the Audit button in the Options Bar The Audit Console section displays the progress of the audit Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 Library Audit Reboot gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Entire Library Yes No Activate Code SelfTest RcvrMove Physical Audit Verified Audit Yes No Yes TransferFile Start Address Type Library Module Row Column End Address Type No Library Module Row Column Audit Console Audit started for the range from 0 1 1 7 to 0 1 1 8 0
24. 6 Refer to your tape management software manual for syntax on how to move the cartridges from the CAP to the storage cells FIGURE 9 1 Base Module Magazine Comparison L204_557 1 Five cell LTO magazine 2 Four cell mixed media magazine 3 Cartridge release buttons 238 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Management Tasks v Eject Cartridges Through the CAP Use this procedure to eject a cartridge from the library through a CAP 1 Type the eject command at the host console Refer to your tape management software publication for the command syntax The robot places cartridges into the CAP cells until all the specified cartridges are in the CAP 2 Press the CAP Open button on the keypad 3 The CAP is opened and the CAP Open LED turns on 4 Remove the ejected cartridges using either of the following methods m Leave the magazine in the CAP and remove the cartridges from it directly m Remove the magazine from the CAP and press the red cartridge release buttons to remove the cartridges from the magazine 5 If you removed the magazine from the CAP place the magazine onto the door rails and slide it back inside the CAP 6 Close the CAP doors 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management 239 Cartridge Management Tasks v List Library Cartridges Use this procedure to display information about all library cartridges including their VOLIDs locations and
25. AAT TN A Of Of alo Ka KO L204_567 1 SDLT 320 data label 2 SDLT 600 data label Note DLT S4 data cartridges contain the number 4 96116 Revision KB Appendix B Cartridge Information 385 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridges FIGURE B 7 SDLT Cartridge Labels 3 SDLT 320 600 diagnostic label Note DLT S4 diagnostic cartridge labels are DG 4 4 SDLT 320 600 cleaning label Note You may use SDLT CLN S cleaning labels for DLT S4 drives Write Protect Switch You can set the write protect switch so the cartridge is write enabled Slide the switch to reveal the orange indicator to write enable the tapes In this position the tape drive can write as well as read data This setting is recommended when inserting cartridges into the tape library You can set the write protect switch so that the cartridge is read only nothing can be written on the tape Slide the switch to reveal the closed lock symbol In this position the tape drive can only read data from the tape but cannot write data to it FIGURE B 8 Set the SDLT Write Protect Switch L204_566 1 Write protect switch data cartridge has orange indicator 2 Write protected position 3 Write enabled position Note See Quantum documentation regarding the write protect write enable setting for DLTtape S4 tapes 386 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge H
26. Available Versions Activate Console 3 In the Target pull down select the code package you want to activate The pull down may display a library firmware package and an SL Console package For this procedure select the firmware package SL500 Code 300 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks 4 The Available Versions section of the screen displays the versions currently residing in flash memory The version identified as running is the currently active code You cannot select this version again to activate 5 Select the code version you want to activate 6 Click the Activate button in the Options Bar The Activation Confirmation dialog appears verifying that you want to continue with the process 7 Click OK to begin the activation If you click Cancel the process terminates and returns to Step 5 The code activation process begins and the Activate Console section of the screen displays the status of the process Caution POTENTIAL INTERNAL FILE CORRUPTION Do not reboot any devices in the library or execute any operations on the library while code is being activated 8 When the activation process is finished a dialog appears prompting you to reboot the library 9 Click OK to reboot the library If you click Cancel the process terminates you will need to reboot the library at a later time See Reboot the Librar
27. Click to display online help for the screen 192 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition CAP Operation Screens See Also None 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 193 Partition CAP Operation Screens 194 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 6 Library Management Automated Mode of Operation When in automated mode of operation the library automatically mounts and dismounts cartridges without physical intervention by a person Automated operations include the following activities Mounting and dismounting cartridges m Entering and ejecting cartridges through a CAP Logging library events n Drive cleaning Cartridge Mount and Dismount Activities The primary function of the library is the automated mounting and dismounting of cartridges Host mount and dismount commands are accepted by the library controller and translated into robotic commands that are performed by the Robot Mount Sequence A simplified mount sequence involves the following steps 1 A host requests that a specific volume serial number VOLID or volser be mounted in a drive 2 The library controller transmits to the host that the VOLID is located within the library and a drive is available to satisfy the mount request 3 The library assumes responsibility for the mount 4 The host command is translated by the library controller into motion commands for the Rob
28. Deleting a Capacity activate for a module in the middle of a library will cause the modules below it to be unavailable Example Base Module DEM CEM CEM Removing any portion of the DEM capacity will make both CEMs unavailable Note CEMs must be at the bottom of any SL500 configuration A CEM cannot be installed between a Base Module and a DEM 88 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions LTO Activated Capacity by Module Hardware Module Activation Key Activated Library Module Value Capacity Total Count Base Module Shipped standard LimitedBase 30 As last module FullBase 50 With any module underneath FullBase 66 Drive Expansion Module DEM As last module ThirdDEM 77 increments of 26 26 25 With any module underneath ThirdDEM 84 increments of 28 28 28 Cartridge Expansion Module CEM after Base Module or DEM As last module FullCEM 104 With any module underneath FullCEM 114 Cartridge Expansion Module CEM after CEM As last module FullCEM 110 With any module underneath FullCEM 120 erations All capacities assume no reserved cells and all CAPs are configured for enter and eject op Mixed Media Activated Capacity by Module Hardware Module Activation Key Activated Library Module Value Capacity Total Count Base M
29. Drive 0 2 1 9 Physical Drive 0 2 3 9 Vendor STK 7 Drive 0 2 4 9 Serial Number 522000000383 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 eee 2 Total Cell Count Empty Cell Count 106 Drive Count 4 CAP Cell Count 15 Library Interface TCPAP DNS Domain Name IP Address 129 80 81 101 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 MAC Address 00 10 4F 02 BD 2D Library Host Interface REBOOT LIBRARY FOR CHANGES TO TAKE AFFECT Interface Type Fibre LVD Target ID nia World Wide Name Node 500104f00079eb93 Port A World Wide Name 500104f00079eb94 Port A Enabled Port A Loop ID use 126 for soft addressing Not Acquired Port A Speed GB Not Acquired Port A Topology Unknown Note The screen includes the library s world wide ID the node ID and the Port A world wide name ID the port ID These two IDs are set at the factory and cannot be changed Each ID is 64 bits and uses the IEEE registered format m To enable soft addressing a Select True from the Port A Enabled pull down to enable Port A b Set the Port A Loop Id to 126 m To enable hard addressing a Select False from the Port A Enabled pull down to disable Port A b Set the Port A Loop ID to value between 1 125 c Select Apply to save the changes 202 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Management Tasks 3 Reboot the library for the changes to take effect 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library M
30. LTO See LTO cartridges maintenance 376 management tasks 236 249 manual operations 348 357 mounts and dismounts 195 ordering 377 recovery moves 235 242 246 removing from a drive 353 removing from the library 349 requirements 376 SDLT DLT S4 See SDLT DLT S4 cartridges storing 376 Ultrium See LTO cartridges unlabeled 235 cleaning cartridges described 251 ejecting expired 251 258 entering 256 listing 260 replacing 357 status 251 clearance specifications library 372 components library back 3 front 2 configurations library LTO5 mixed media 9 controls and indicators ACTIVE 14 EJECT OK 14 FAULT 14 keypad 10 Library Active 12 Open CAP 13 Open Door 13 power supply 10 RLC card 14 Service Required 13 Service Robot 12 Standby 14 Current Drive Mappings Report 223 D diagnostic cartridges ejecting 258 entering 256 labels 378 library self tests and 272 diagnostic moves robot control functions 279 controlling 324 defining 314 317 420 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 described 277 279 managing definitions 318 319 monitoring 324 pool address range 278 random access order 278 saving 320 321 sequential access order 278 starting 322 323 target address range 277 dimensions library 371 disconnecting external SCSI cables 15 dismount operations 196 Door Open indicator 13 drive cleaning automatic 252 configuring auto clean 254 described 251 252 ejecting cleaning cartridges 258 entering cleaning cartri
31. Note Clicking this button does not update the library controller database Cancel Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 158 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Partition Design and Commit Screens Partitions Design Step 3 Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results Partitions Commit Step 4 Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 159 Partition Design and Commit Screens Partitions Design Step 3 Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Verify Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports partition Left Side Wall Rear Side Wall Select by cen v Base Module1 LTO Add Remove Right Side Wall Totals For Partition 1 Allocated Storage Cells 27 Allocated Drives 1 Allocated CAP Cells 2 Available Totals Unallocated Storage Cells 19 Unallocated Drives 0 Unallocated CAP Cells 1 UU HP Drive Module2 LTO Legend Not Accessible C unallocated E Partition 1 HE Other Partitions Cartridge Partition 6 Module 2 row 2 col 9 Cartridge Emp Description Allows you to define partition boundaries by selecting the resources storage cells tape drives or CAP cells y
32. Partition Details m Partitions Reports Partition Summary 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 181 Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Refresh a Orphaned Cartridge Report v Mod Row Col Vol Ser Explanation 3 3 1 01241 6L1 Unreachable from any 3 11 IDG 003L2 Unreachable from any 3 1 A00008L1 Unreachable from any 3 1 1 IEN0341 L1 Unreachable from any 4 gt Print Save To File Description Displays the locations and volume serial numbers VOLIDs of all orphaned cartridges in the library Also identifies why the cartridge is orphaned Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Optionally you can print the screen data or save it to a comma separated file 182 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision
33. Preface Updated Chapter 1 General Information Renamed and updated Chapter 2 Controls and Indicators Deleted Information now in Chapter 1 Chapter 3 Library Operation Renamed and updated Chapter 4 SL500 StorageTek Library Console Moved to Chapter 2 No substantive changes Chapter 5 Troubleshooting Deleted Information now in new Chapter 7 Chapter 6 Cartridge Information Moved to Appendix B Chapter 7 Library Partitioning Moved to Chapter 6 and updated for new License Management feature Appendix A Customer Contacts Deleted Updated information now in Preface Appendix B Web based SL Console Server Moved to Appendix C No substantive changes Glossary Updated Index Updated xx SL500 User s Guide June 2010 New Organization Preface Information previously included in Appendix A Customer Contacts has been updated and moved to this section Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction Wall diagrams and specifications previously included in this chapter have been moved to Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications Information previously included in Chapter 2 Controls and Indicators has been moved to this chapter Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console previously Chapter 4 No substantive changes Chapter 3 SL500 Automated Library Operations Added detailed procedures in t
34. Reserved Slots 5 In the Source Location table specify the library internal address of the source location by making the appropriate selections in the following pull down menus m Library m Module m Row m Column The following special selections are available on the pull down menus m Min First element of that location type library module row or column in the library m Max Last element of that location type library module row or column in the library 6 In the Destination Location Type pull down menu select the type of location where you want to move the cartridge to Options are 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management 247 Cartridge Management Tasks a CAP m Storage Slots m Drive m Reserved Slots The following restrictions apply m The destination location can be a drive only if the source is a CAP or reserved slot m For you to move a a cartridge to a drive the cartridge media type must be compatible with the drive type m You cannot move a cartridge to a location that is already occupied m Although not strictly enforced it is recommended that only diagnostic or cleaning cartridges be moved to reserved slots 7 In the Destination Location table specify the library internal address of the destination location by making the appropriate selections in the following pull down menus m Library a Module a Row m Column The following special selections are av
35. Statistics gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Configure Cleaning Cartridges Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 2 Z f Auto Clean Configuration Auto Clean Threshold Configuration SDLT Warning Threshold UniversalLTO Warning Threshold 3 Set the Auto Clean field to Enabled 254 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Cleaning Tasks 4 In the Threshold Configuration section specify the warning thresholds for each cartridge type Tools Help System Detail gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 0 amp Drive Folder1 0 0 0 0 gt Elevator Folder 1 0 0 0 0 gt A Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0 o Power Supply Folder 1 0 0 0 o Safety Door Folder 1 0 0 0 0 Properties Auto Clean Configure Cleaning Cartridges Auto Clean Configuration Apply Refresh Auto Clean Partition 1 or None Auto Clean Partition 2 Auto Clean Partition 3 Auto Clean Partition 4 Auto Clean Configuration 9X40 Titanium Warning Threshold LTO Warning Threshold 5 Click Apply 96116 Revision KB Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning 255 Drive Cleaning Tasks v Enter Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges Use this procedure to enter new cleaning or diagnostic cartridges to the library through a CAP The cartridges will be inserted into system cells Before beginning this procedure verify that all the following conditions
36. s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management v Update the Web launched SL Console You can update the Web launched SL Console while it is running Updates are automatically propagated to the clients when they retrieve the Web launched SL Console application from the server Note Before you perform this activity you must obtain the Web launched SL Console update CD 1 On the server insert the Web launched SL Console update CD in the CD drive 2 Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console See Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console on page 398 for details 3 On the Common Tasks screen click Edit Virtual Server VERSION LOG OUT User admin Server C129684 Sun Java System Web Server J Common Tasks Configurations Nodes Server Certificates Monitoring Common Tasks To access information about a task select the i info button To understand the terminology click here Configuration Tasks Virtual Server Tasks C129684 Jouisville stortek com lids i C129684 Iouisville stortek com zipi Edit Configuration kWj Edit Virtual Serve kij New Instance kij Add Web Application i a i Sonen Edit Virtual Server al Start Stop Instances ES l Document Directories Edit Java Settings hiy l cel Directories At PU Request Server Certificate ay A URL Redirects ay Install Server Certificate EN View Summary k
37. 303 304 305 306 range of cells 305 306 tasks 302 308 verified 276 307 308 auto clean drive described 252 automated mode library described 195 determining 196 ejecting a cartridge through the CAP 239 entering a cartridge through the CAP 237 tape management software and 25 B Base Module location 3 LTO capacity 5 LTO wall diagrams 361 mixed media capacity 9 96116 Revision KB mixed media wall diagrams 366 C CAP operations summarized 211 tasks 212 215 capacity activated See activated capacity allocated in partitioned libraries 95 physical See physical capacity Capacity on Demand 87 92 features of 87 terminology 88 Capacity on Demand See Also activated capacity CAPs and library partitions 102 inserting cartridges into 237 library partitions and 134 140 190 193 magazine cells 238 Open indicator 13 properties 215 removing cartridges from 239 status 214 summary information 213 using to eject cartridges 211 239 using to enter cartridges 211 237 cartridge access ports See CAPs Cartridge Expansion Module location 3 LTO capacities 5 LTO wall diagrams 364 mixed media capacities 9 mixed media wall diagrams 369 cartridges cleaning See cleaning cartridges colored 377 diagnostic See diagnostic cartridges ejecting through the CAP 211 239 entering through the CAP 211 237 handling 375 inserting into a drive 352 inserting into storage cells 350 419 inspecting 376 listing 240 locating 349
38. Display Cleaning Cartridges on page 260 Note You can initiate a manual clean even if the drive needs cleaning status is false 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Expand the Drive Folder 3 Select the drive that requires cleaning and then select the Clean tab Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 gt CAF Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive 0 1 1 2 Drive 0 1 2 9 Drive 0 3 1 9 Drive 0 3 2 9 Drive 0 3 4 9 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Start Clean Reboot Selffest Clean Drive Cleaning Console 262 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Cleaning Tasks 4 Click the Start Clean button in the Options Bar A confirmation popup appears SLConsole x A Start drive cleaning process om ewes 5 Click OK 6 The Drive Clean Status Console displays the status of the cleaning operation Tools Help Diagnostics Start Clean Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 i Selffest Clean gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Drive Cleaning Console Operation is starting Vv Drive 0 1 1 9 loperation started Drive 0 1 2 9 i Drive Cleaning notice oe No compatible cleaning cartridge found Drive 0 3 1 9 for drive IRC 0 1 1 9 v Drive 0 3 2 9 No cleaning initiated for this drive 7 Drive 0 3 4 9 i Operation completed Robot F
39. Drives 4 CAP cells 12 Resources Unallocated Storage Cells 224 Add Partition Drives 4 CAP cells 24 Name Partition 1 Barcode Presentation Left 6 label characters Default Connections Initiator WWWPN 20 00 00 40 BD 08 04 00 Add Connection Delete Connection Modify Connection 2 Click OK to confirm the changes Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace for the duration of this login session To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login session see Verify Partition Configurations on page 114 and Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 123 Partition Management Tasks v Delete a Host Partition Connection Use this procedure to delete a host partition connection After you perform this procedure the host will no longer be able to access the partition 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Summary Step 2 tab Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step3 Commit Step4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition Summary Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated Sage alle ERE Number Storage Cells Drives CAP Cells Drives 8 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125 Drives 4 CAP cells fz Resources Unallocated Storage
40. IMPORTANT READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY This License Agreement License is a legal agreement between you either an individual or an entity and Storage Technology Corporation StorageTek or the authorized StorageTek reseller from which you acquired the StorageTek SL500 8500 library and that includes this Streamline Library Console remote or local Software BY PROCEEDING WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT GRANT OF LICENSE You are hereby granted a personal nonexclusive license to use the Streamline Library Console remote or local Software and all associated manuals and documentation the Software on any host computers or StorageTek storage subsystems on which the Software was initially installed and that in the event that you upgrade your StorageTek SL8500 library for which the Software was initially provided to install an optional local operator console Console you may use the Software to download the local version of the Software on the Console __LICFHSE RESTRICTIONS 1 do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 49 General SL Console Usage Tasks 4 Scroll down to read the complete license agreement Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement and then click OK The SL Console Login screen appears Ro Sun storacetek LIBRARY CONSOLE User ID Password 5
41. KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Screen Fields Module Display only Module number where the orphaned cartridge is located Row Display only Row number where the orphaned cartridge is located Rows are numbered consecutively from the top down with row 1 at the top Column Display only Column number where the orphaned cartridge is located Column location is referenced from the center of the drive bays 1 is to the right of the drive bays 1 is to the left Vol Ser Display only Volume serial number VOLID of the orphaned cartridge Explanation Display only Explanation of why the cartridge is orphaned Because this report is produced from the library controller database the only option is a Unreachable from any host Buttons Print Click to print the report on a selected printer Save to File Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary m Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary m Partitions Reports Partition Details m Partitions Reports Partition Summary 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 183 Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports Partition Details Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Instruct
42. Message Reserved cell check Message Diag Tape Check Message Register for Diagnostic Events Message Diagnostic Invoked using Cartridge 0 1 1 1 YolID DG 009L1 Message DIAGNOSTIC STARTED Message Basic Health 294 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks 6 When the test completes the results of the test are displayed in the Diagnostic Console Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 ay _AA A_ A A i _ _ i i ii oqo qi gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Diagnostic Console Diagnostic started Diagnostic started Message Reserved cell check Message Diag Tape Check Message Register for Diagnostic Events Message Diagnostic Invoked using Cartridge 0 1 1 1 YolID DG 00911 Message DIAGNOSTIC STARTED Message Basic Health Message Cell to Cell Message Cell to CAP Message Cell to CAP Message Mount Dismount Drive 1 Message Mount Dismount Drive 4 Message Mount Dismount Drive 5 Message LC returned Error The diagnostic was unsuccessfully completed Completion Code 3343 All Drives Test Incomplete One Or More Drives Occupied No Action Require Diagnostic failed 7 The library is automatically brought back online so you can resume normal ope
43. Properties Statistics Auto Clean SNMP Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Drive 0 1 2 9 Ski Drive 0 2 1 9 Operational State Operational Drive 0 2 3 9 a Closed Drive 0 2 4 9 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Power Supply Module Position Working Status 1 1 Inoperative 2 Operative Module Position Working Status Operative Operative If the library has the Multi Port feature installed then detail is shown for all FC SCI ports 200 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Management Tasks v Display Library Configuration Information Use this procedure to display the physical mechanical and logical configuration of the library Some of the information can is set up automatically during library initialization while other information can be defined by the user Note This information is also available through Reports gt Library Information See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Click the Properties tab and then the General tab The screen displays detailed information about the library Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Properties Statistics Auto Clean SNMP v OvO FORET N00 General Library Controller Module Drive 0 1 2 9 Drive 0 2 1 9 Phy
44. The screen display is from the perspective of Partition 1 therefore the resources allocated to Partition 1 are shown in gold and the resources allocated to Partition 2 and Partition 6 are shown in red TABLE 5 1 on page 97 describes the resource allocation in detail TABLE 5 1 Partition Example Resource Description Resource Group Included Resources Partition 1 All resources are shown in gold Includes the following a Tape drive in the Base Module Storage cells in the left side of the Base Module a Top two CAP cells in the Base Module Partition 2 All resources are shown in red Includes the following a Top tape drive in the Drive Module Storage cells in the right side of the Base Module a No allocated CAP cells Partition 6 All resources are shown in red Includes the following a Bottom tape drive in the Drive Module a Storage cells in the Drive Module a Bottom two CAP cells in the Base Module 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 97 Deleting the Partitioning Feature TABLE 5 1 Partition Example Resource Description Resource Group Included Resources Common CAP cell Middle CAP cell in the Base Module Unassigned All resources shown in white Not Accessible All resources shown x ed out Orphaned Cartridge in unallocated white storage cell in the Base Module cartridge Deleting the Partitioning Feature You can delete the Partitioning feature by deleting the Partitioning hardwa
45. Y Robot Folder10 0 0 cartridge from its current location Source Location back to its original home location The Destination Location Source Location Destination Location Mode Type Cap Location VOLID Library ae Soan 242 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Management Tasks 3 In the Source Location Mode field click VOLID The screen is updated with the appropriate Source Location fields Tools Help Diagnostics Start Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library Te Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RcvrMove TransferFile CAP 0 1 0 8 Drive Folder1000 RECOVERY MOVE Choose source and destination location for move Then choose Start button above to initiate cartridge move This move function is intended to move a Y RobotFotder4 0 0 0 cartridge from its current location Source Location back to its original home location The Destination Location Source Location Destination Location ote me few r Location VOLID Liorary Max Module Max Row Max Column Max VOLID 4 In the VOLID field specify the VOLID of the cartridge you want to move 5 In the Destination Location Type pull down menu select the type of location where you want to move the cartridge to Options are m CAP m Storage Slots m Drive m Reserved Slots The following
46. caP 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 o gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 CAP Operation Tasks 5 Click the Assign CAP Button tab The Assign CAP Button screen appears CAP Assign CAP Button Assign CAP Button Partitions Assigned To This CAP Button Select the partition to be assigned to the CAPButton then click Apphy to make assignment Import Export Partitions with common cap configuration pam OS 4 HE DF O8 None Common only Partitions with split cap configuration 1 E6 _ All Split only 6 In the Common CAP and Split CAP tables click the partitions from which you are ejecting cartridges See Diagnostics gt CAP Assign CAP Button on page 191 for details on these screen fields 7 Click Apply The CAP Confirm popup appears SLConsole Confirm xi A This will assign the CAP to the specified partition Do want to continue this process 8 Click OK 9 Depending on how your library s CAPs are configured this operation may expose CAP cells that are not accessible to the requesting host s partition For example because a split CAP can contain common cells or cells allocated to multiple 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 139 CAP Operation Tasks partitions opening the CAP door may expose cells not allocated to the selected partition If any of the inaccessible cells contain cartridges the CAP do
47. procedure you must remove the inaccessible cartridges from the CAP 9 On the library control panel push the CAP Open button 10 The library opens the doors of all CAPs with cells accessible to the selected partition Doors to CAPs that contain only inaccessible cells do not open The library also sends CAP status messages to all hosts with access to the exposed cells Following are examples m Ifthe library opens common CAPs only messages are sent to all hosts with access to common CAP cells m If the library opens a split CAP containing both allocated and common cells messages are sent to all hosts in the assigned partitions as well as all hosts with access to common CAP cells 11 Place the cartridges in any CAP cells that are accessible to the selected partition Note If you place cartridges in cells that are not accessible to the selected partition the CAP door will not lock You must move the cartridges to the appropriate CAP cells 12 Close the CAP It locks automatically 13 Move the cartridges from the CAP to storage cells within the selected partition See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 14 Once the selected partitions are finished with the CAP it is recommended that you restore the Assign CAP Button screen to the following settings This will help to prevent cartridges from being entered inadvertently into the wrong partition in the next CAP operatio
48. v Modify Partition Summary Information Use this procedure to change the name or barcode presentation format of an existing partition Note You cannot change the partition ID To assign a different Partition ID you must delete the old partition and create a new one with the new ID 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Summary Step 2 tab The Summary Step 2 screen appears Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition Summary 2 Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated Glorage Gaile SE Number Storage Cells Drives CAP Cells Drives 8 71 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125 Drives 4 CAP cells 12 Resources Unallocated Storage Cells 224 Add Partition Delete Partition Modify Partition Drives 4 CAP cells 24 2 In the Partition Summary section select the partition you want to modify 3 Click Modify Partition The Modify a Partition popup appears MODIFY A PARTITION E 4 x Modify Partition 1 Name Partition1 Barcode Presentation Right 6 label characters SA OK Cancel ifi 4 Enter the changes you want to make 5 Click OK to confirm the changes 120 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Management Tasks v Delete a Partition Use thi
49. 14 2 FIGURE 14 3 FIGURE 14 4 FIGURE 14 5 FIGURE A 1 FIGURE A 2 FIGURE A 3 FIGURE A 4 FIGURE A 5 FIGURE A 6 FIGURE A 7 FIGURE A 8 FIGURE A 9 FIGURE A 10 FIGURE B 1 FIGURE B 2 Front View of Library Components 2 Back View of Library Components 3 Buttons and Indicators 12 Robotics Components 20 Hand Assembly 21 Library Interfaces Locations 24 Library Partition Example 97 Base Module Magazine Comparison 238 Insert Mixed Media Cartridges into Arrays 351 Insert Cartridge into Drive 352 Remove a Cartridge from an LTO Tape Drive 353 Remove a Cartridge from an SDLT Tape Drive 353 Manual Release Screw 356 Base Module LTO Cells 361 LTO Cell Locations for Firmware Site Mapping 362 LTO Cell Locations for SCSI Element Numbering Mapping 363 LTO Cells for Back Wall of Cartridge Expansion Module 364 Base Module Mixed Media Cells 366 Mixed Media Firmware Cell Mapping 367 Mixed Media SCSI Element Numbering Mapping 368 Mixed Media Cells for Back Wall of Cartridge Expansion Module 369 Library and Rack Dimensions 371 Library and Rack Clearances 372 LTO Cartridge Components 378 LTO Cartridge Labels 380 96116 Revision KB Xv FIGURE B 3 FIGURE B 4 FIGURE B 5 FIGURE B 6 FIGURE B 7 FIGURE B 8 Apply the Utrium Cartridge Label 381 Set the LTO Write Protect Switch 381 SDLT Cartridge Components 383 Apply the SDLT Cartridge Label 384 SDLT Cartridge Labels 385 Set the SDLT Write Prote
50. 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Partition Required Partition to which you want to add or remove resources storage cells tape drives or CAP cells The pull down menu displays all valid partition IDs for the library If no partition IDs have been defined the menu is blank Note When you select a partition the screen is automatically updated to display data for that partition from the SL Console partition workspace Select by Required Indicates the method you want to use for defining partition boundaries Options are a Cell Select individual or rectangular groups of resources a Side Select all resources except the CAP within one side of a library module a Module Select all resources except the CAP within a library module Note You must select either Add or Remove Add Required Indicates you want to add resources to the partition You will only be able to click unallocated resources on the library map Remove Required 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 161 Partition Design and Commit Screens Indicates you want to remove resources from the partition You will only be able to click allocated resources on the library map Library Totals Note The data in these fields is automatically updated from the SL Console partition workspace when you select a partition Allocated Storage Cells Display only Total number of storage ce
51. 5 from top to bottom of the rack Mounts Display only 230 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks Total number of cartridge mounts initiated during the selected time Period Total mounts for all drives in the library is displayed at the bottom Percent Utilization Display only Percentage of time the drive was busy during the selected time period For example a value of 25 70 means the drive was busy 25 7 percent of the time The value is calculated as follows Seconds busy total seconds in time period Percent Total Mounts Display only Percentage of total library mounts that occurred on this drive For example a value of 49 1 means that 49 1 percent of all mounts that occurred during this time interval occurred on this drive The value is calculated as follows Total mounts for this drive Total mounts for all drives 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 231 Drive Management Tasks v Display the Drive Utilization Reports Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1393 and SL Console version FRS_4 50 The Drive Utilization Reports summarize cartridge mount activity that has occurred for an individual drive location during a selected time period Activity is broken into regular time intervals within the selected time period You can use this report to determine patterns of drive activity over time and whether there are peak and l
52. 5 Library Partitioning 145 Partition Summary Screens Screen Fields Partition Summary Partition Number Display only ID assigned to the partition IDs can range from 1 8 Storage Cells Display only Total number of storage cells allocated to this partition Drive Bays Display only Total number of tape drives allocated to this partition CAP Cells Display only Total number of individual CAP cells allocated to this partition Host Partition Connection Summary Note The following fields display host partition connection information for the partition currently selected in the Partition Summary table Name Display only Name assigned to the selected partition Library controller bar code presentation Display only Tape cartridge bar code format assigned to the selected partition Initiator WWPN Display only World Wide Port Name of the host bus adapter HBA Target Port Display only Port number of the SL500 library controller This entry is always 0 LUN Display only Logical unit number of the library partition on the host This entry must be unique on the host 146 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens TOTAL LIBRARY RESOURCES Storage Cells in Library Display only Total physical capacity of the library Drive Bays in Library Display only Total number of tape drives in the library Total CAP cells Display only Total number of CAP c
53. 7 0 Update 1 is a full multi language product installation For platform and Search the Download patch requirements features localizations and other important information please read the Release Notes Center h New in Java System Web Server 7 0 Update 1 Searc Performance and stability improvements Search Tips Outof box Java support for Servlets 2 5 JSP 2 1 JSF 1 2 and more Supportfor Java SE 5 0 and 6 Support for NetBeans IDE 5 0 5 5 and 5 5 1 eee Administration interface support for FastCGI FAQs More Purchasing amp shipping lici Java System Web Server 7 0 introduced shes te R 3 Change registration Solaris AMD 64 and SPARC 64 bit platform support information Redesigned administration framework featuring Upgrade software Cluster management D load Order hist Easy access to frequently utilized activities ea ace ail any Wizards to assist with difficult tasks Sun Download Manager Full featured and scriptable Command Line Interface Simplified management of SSL certificates Some resurs Fully localized browser based Graphical Interface docs sun com Multi language Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 Multi language Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition Multi language Solaris 9 10 x86 Multi language Windows XP Professional Multi language Red Hat Enterprise Linux 3 U4 Multi language SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 x86 Multi language HP UX 11i Multi language Solaris 8 9 10 SPARC Multi la
54. 7_u1 solars amd64 tar gz 130 84 MB Enterprise Linux 3 U4 Red Hat Enterprise Linux 4 SUSE Linux Enterprise Server 9 x86 Platform Sun Java System Web Server 7 0 1 Sunda ystem Web S ver 7 0 Update 1 Linux Multi language sjows 7_0ut inuxi66 tar 92 113 50 MB 6 In the popup click Save to Disk to save the compressed archive file to a directory of your choice and click OK Note This process may take several minutes You have chosen to open sjsws 7_0u1 solaris sparc tar gz which is a WinZip File from http sdic esd sun com What should Firefox do with this File C Openwith stats f Save to Disk Do this automatically For files like this From now on Cancel 7 Use the appropriate extraction utility for example gunzip pkunzip to extract the Sun Java System Web Server files to a directory of your choice 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 393 Server Installation and Management v Install the Sun Java System Web Server Use this procedure to install the Java System Web Server if it is not already installed on your server 1 In the directory where you have extracted the Sun Java System Web Server files double click or execute from a command line the setup file setup or setup exe depending on your platform If you are installing on a Solaris platform you may need to invoke root or sudo permi
55. 96116 Revision KB iii Tape Drives and Cartridges 15 LTO Tape Drives and Cartridges 16 SDLT DLT S4 Tape Drives and Cartridges 16 Cartridge Access Ports 18 Robotics Unit 18 Power System 21 Cooling 21 Electronics 22 RLC Card 22 Interface Cards 22 Safety Features 23 Cards and Power Supply 23 Robotics 23 Front Door 23 Interfaces 24 Tape Management Software 25 2 StorageTek Library Console 27 Introduction 27 SL Console Modes 27 SL Console Security 28 User IDs 28 Activation Password 28 SL Console Screen Display 29 Modifying the Screen Layout 30 Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database 30 Logging In 30 Making Library Configuration Updates 30 SL Console Reports 32 Report Types 32 Report Options Bar 32 Report Procedures 33 SL Console Help 34 Accessing the SL Console Help 34 iv SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Help Navigation 34 Tips for Using the SL Console Help 35 Web launched SL Console 36 Security Considerations 36 Client Requirements 36 Web launched SL Console Updates 36 Starting the Web launched SL Console on a Client 37 Standalone SL Console 38 Security Considerations 38 Installation Requirements 38 Standalone SL Console Updates 39 SL Console Task Summary 40 General SL Console Usage Tasks 41 Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using a Browser or Command Line 42 Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using an Icon 47 Log in to the Standalone SL Console 51 Log Off the SL Consol
56. CLN plus C2 for IBM DG Diagnostic cartridge apply a DG label to a blank data cartridge to be used for library diagnostic tests Note Check availability for LTO Gen 4 drives and media Library firmware must be Version 1126 or later to support LTO Gen 4 drives and media 96116 Revision KB Appendix B Cartridge Information 379 LTO Ultrium Cartridges FIGURE B 2 LTO Cartridge Labels O NUMAN ITIP Cc PS Oot Tt on ve Ee Se Mi FA D G a 0 0 mit L204_214 1 LTO Generation 2 data cartridge label Note Generation 3 data cartridge labels are L3 Generation 4 data cartridge labels are L4 2 LTO Generation 2 Diagnostics cartridge label 3 LTO Universal cleaning cartridge label 4 LTO 400 GB Worm cartridge label LTO Generation 3 and 4 Note LTO 800 GB Worm cartridge labels are LU and available for Generation 4 drives only 380 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 LTO Ultrium Cartridges Labels must be attached as shown in the following figure FIGURE B 3 Apply the Utrium Cartridge Label L204_020 1 Volume number label Write protect Switch You can set the write protect switch so the cartridge is write enabled Slide the switch to reveal the open lock symbol to write enable the tapes In this position the tape drive can write as well as read data This setting is recommended when inserting cartridges
57. COLUMN COLUMNS E 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 LEFT SIDE WALL REAR WALL RIGHT SIDE WALL CAP ono aao nmn so 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 lt gt 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 L204_558 366 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Mixed Media Configurations FIGURE A 6 Mixed Media Firmware Cell Mapping 8 COLUMNS 7 6 COLUMN 9 COLUMNS 7 l z Q D a T S 7 l z x lt wi 7 l Ei W Q D ol Le ui rN oO tTAH ono nAn tH ON MAD WET IUN BORREN AU AU Rage Wo ELLE MK coza Nnnn OR aA tm KR OLD Sa Robot Park Zone Expansion Identification Label MU MUU NAO tH ROAD L204_559 Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 367 96116 Revision KB Mixed Media Configurations FIGURE A 7 Mixed Media SCSI Element Numbering Mapping 8 COLUMNS 5 a ee a COLUMNS 3 2 1 n l z W A n lt G o n a z co lt o n a z W A no H W a Robot Park Zone SOo dw L204_560 V MME Revision KB 96116 368 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Mixed Media Configurations FIGURE A 8 Mixed Media Cells for Back Wall of Cartridge Expansion Module Base or Drive Expansion Module Base or Drive Expansion Module Installed Above CEM Installed Above CEM COLUMNS 9 10 11 ofono ana on ofon oo 8 ofn o No Module Ca
58. Capacity feature this field displays the total amount of storage capacity the activation file provides Depending on the feature the field may be blank Buttons Install Click to install the displayed hardware activation file on the library you are logged in to 84 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Browse Click to navigate to the hardware activation file you want to display and install Note If the library serial number in the specified hardware activation file does not match the serial number of the library you are logged in to a warning appears and the hardware activation file detail is not displayed Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also m Hardware Activation gt Current Hardware Activation Keys 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 85 Hardware Activation Screen Reference 86 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 4 Capacity on Demand The SL500 library includes the Capacity on Demand feature Capacity on Demand separates physical capacity from activated capacity and allows you to pay only for the capacity you need Then as your needs grow you can add modules and activate the portion that you need To expand capacity within a module you need only purchase and install a hardware activation file for the new capacity and then reboot the library Note Start
59. DLT S4 tape drives 96116 Revision KB Appendix B Cartridge Information 383 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridges Labels must be attached as shown in the following figure FIGURE B 6 Apply the SDLT Cartridge Label L204_565 1 Volume number label Note Consult Quantum documentation regarding application of labels for DLTtape S4 tapes Valid Labels SDLT DLT S4 cartridge labels have six seven or eight characters see the following note The last character is the media ID S 2 or 4 CLN or DG are the first characters on the cleaning or diagnostic label 384 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridges Note Discuss whether you want six or seven characters with your service representative The representative can set what characters are available with the orientlabel print and orientlabel host commands from the command line interface TABLE 0 1 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridge Codes Label Type of Cartridge S SDLT 220 320 data cartridge 2 SDLT 600 data cartridges 4 DLTtape S4 data cartridges CLN 5 SDLT cleaning cartridge DG 2 Diagnostic cartridge SDLT DG 4 Diagnostic cartridge DLT S4 Note Apply a DG label to a blank data cartridge to be used for library diagnostic tests FIGURE B 7 SDLT Cartridge Labels 9 iz iz H g 2 g
60. Diagnostic started Message Reserved cell check Message Diag Tape Check Message Register for Diagnostic Events Message Diagnostic Invoked using Cartridge 0 1 1 1 VolID DG 009L1 Message DIAGNOSTIC STARTED Message Basic Health Message Cell to Cell Message Cell to CAP Message Cell to CAP Message Mount Dismount Drive 1 Message Mount Dismount Drive 4 Message Mount Dismount Drive 5 Message LC returned Error The diagnostic was unsuccessfully completed Completion Code 3343 All Drives Test Incomplete One Or More Drives Occupied No Action Require Diagnostic failed 292 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks v Perform a Disruptive Library Self Test Use this procedure to perform a disruptive library self test which can be used to help diagnose operational problems with the library In order for the test to run completely the proper diagnostic cartridges for library drives must be present in the library To verify this see List Library Cartridges on page 240 The library will be taken offline to all hosts while the test runs and then brought back online when the test completes 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics and click the Library folder 2 Click the Self Test tab The Self Test screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0
61. Enter your login information and click Log on User ID SLC_login Password password Library library_ID where m SLC_login is the SL Console user ID m password is the password assigned to this user ID m library_ID is the library to which you want to connect expressed in either of the following ways a IP address of the library in dotted decimal notation nnn nnn nnn nnn a DNS alias of the library Note The user ID you use determines the screens you can access See SL Console Security on page 28 50 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks v Log in to the Standalone SL Console 1 Start the SL Console application on your PC or workstation by doing either of the following m Double click the SL Console icon on the desktop m Select Start gt RunSLConsole or Launch gt RunSLConsole The SL Console starts and the Login screen appears Ro Sun storacetek LIBRARY CONSOLE User ID Password Library 2 Enter your login information User ID SLC_login Password password Library library_ID where m SLC_login is the SL Console user ID m password is the password assigned to this user ID m library_ID is the library to which you want to connect expressed in either of the following ways a IP address of the library in dotted decimal notation nnn nnn nnn nnn a DNS alias of the library Note The user ID you use determine
62. Java Settings ES E CGI Directories kWj ___ Request Server Certificate ES _URL Redirects kij ___ Install Server Certificate ES ___ View Summary lay d View Summary la New Configuration lay New Virtual Server la Migrate la l View Logs i Documentation F View Online Documentation E 4 On the Add Web Application screen make the following entries m Web Application Location Click the Browse button and browse to the location of the opel war file on the installation CD m URI Type opel m Leave all other fields as the defaults 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 401 Server Installation and Management m Click OK Sun Java System Web Server Add Web Application Add Web Application from this page You can add a web application archive war file or specify the web application path in the server Virtual Server Web Application Location URI Target Directory Description JSP Pre compilation 402 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Indicates required field C129684 louisyille stortek com Specify a package file to upload to the Web Server JCASLC_WebLaunch opel war Browse Specify a package file or a directory path that must be accessible from the server el Specify the URI for your web application This will be the application s context root and is relative to the server host Default This directory Directory to deploy the w
63. L204_019 1 Write protect switch data cartridge has red switch cleaning cartridge has gray switch 2 Volume ID label barcode to hub side of cartridge 3 Access door 4 Leader pin Valid Labels LTO cartridge labels have six or eight characters see the following note The last two characters are the Media ID L1 L2 L3 L4 LT LU and CU The cleaning and diagnostic label have a CLN or DG as the first characters on the label See FIGURE B 2 Note Unlabeled cartridges are not supported 378 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 LTO Ultrium Cartridges Discuss whether you want six or eight characters with your service representative The representative can set what characters are available with the orientlabel print and orientlabel host commands from the command line interface TABLE B 1 LTO Cartridge Codes Label Type of Cartridge L1 Generation 1 data cartridge L2 Generation 2 data cartridge L3 Generation 3 data cartridge L4 Generation 4 data cartridge LT Write once read many times WORM 400 GB LTO Gen 3 drive only This feature prevents the user from altering or erasing information from the tape For more information go to your vendor Web site and do a search on WORM LU Write once read many times WORM 800 GB LTO Gen 4 drive only CLN plus CU Universal cleaning cartridge Use this universal label instead of a vendor unique label CLN plus C1 for Hewlett Packard or
64. Li x Select a partition id a v Name Barcode Tete Right 6 label characters OK Cancel 3 Select the Partition ID you want to add and enter the Name and Barcode Presentation Note Partition IDs do not need to be contiguous For example you can create partition 2 and partition 4 with no partitions 1 or 3 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 109 Partition Configuration Tasks 4 Click OK Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace for the duration of this login session To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login session see Verify Partition Configurations on page 114 and Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 110 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Configuration Tasks v Configure a Host Partition Connection Use this procedure to configure the connection between a host and a selected partition You must perform this procedure in order for the partition to be accessible by the host Each partition can have up to nine host connections each with a unique LUN Also each host can connect to multiple partitions Note The SL500 supports only SCSI connections between the host and library 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Summary Step 2 tab Tools Help Partitions Refresh
65. Library Console 43 General SL Console Usage Tasks a Specify the action you want to take with the slc jn1p file a Click the Open with Java TM Web Start Launcher radio button if you want to start the SL Console directly a Click the Save to Disk radio button if you want to save the slc jn1p file to your client and log in to the SL Console later See Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using an Icon on page 47 for login instructions b Optionally click the Do this automatically for files like this from now on checkbox If you make this selection this popup will not appear during future logins c Click OK If this is the first time you are running the Web launched SL Console a digital signature warning popup appears Warning Security x The application s digital signature has been verified Do G you want to run the application Name StorageTek Library Console Publisher Streamline Library Console From http f aitor stortek com 8181 Cancel More Information i The digital signature has been validated by a trusted source 6 Complete the popup as follows a Verify the Publisher b Optionally click the Always trust content from the publisher checkbox If you make this selection this popup will not appear during future logins 44 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks c Click Run If this is the first time you are ru
66. Module Number Capacity Sequence Number 1 Full Capacity 9001 99002 2 Full Capacity 9003 3 Full Capacity 9004 4 Full Capacity 9005 5 Full Capacity 9006 Cells Activated 349 Cells Not Activated 1 Total Numbers of Cells 350 Description Displays the contents of all hardware activation files currently installed on the library you are logged in to You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Screen Fields Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary Feature Name of the feature activated on the library 80 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Sequence Number Display only Unique sequence number assigned to the hardware activation file by Oracle Corporation Note Sequence numbers 99000 and above are permanently retained and cannot be deleted from the library Value Display only Qualification for the feature if applicable For example for the Capacity feature this field displays the capacity the activation file provides such as FullBase ThirdDEM etc Depending on the feature the field may be blank or indicate None Enabled Display only Indicates whether the feature is currently activated on the library Options are a Yes Feature has been activated a No Feature has been installed but not activated the library must be rebooted in order for the
67. Non applicable Read and Read and 400 GB write write WORM LU Non applicable Non applicable Non Read and 800 GB applicable write Note When available LTO 4 drives are supported with library firmware 1126 and later Note LTO 3 drives can accept 400 GB WORM Write Once Read Many cartridges LTO 4 drives can also accept these plus the 800 GB WORM cartridges SDLT DLT S4 Tape Drives and Cartridges Note Your robotics unit must be part number 314558705 or higher to read SDLT DLT S4 cartridge labels This section discusses media compatibility and cartridge labels For all other tape drive and media information such as specifications refer to 16 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Tape Drives and Cartridges m The specific vender Web site m http www sun com storagetek index jsp For best results m Use Super DLT tape 1 cartridges in SDLT 320 tape drives m Use Super DLT tape 2 cartridges in SDLT 600 tape drives m Use DLT tape S4 cartridges in DLT S4 tape drives The following table lists the compatibility issues among the various SDLT cartridges and tape drives Consider the information if you need to migrate your data from older types of cartridges to newer ones TABLE 1 9 SDLT DLT S4 Media Tape Drive Compatibility Media SDLT 1 media SDLT 2 media DLTIV media DLT tape S4 SDLT 320 Drive SDLT 600 Drive DLT S4 Drive Read and write Read only Read only No action Read and
68. Operations on page 211 Note Although it is possible to enter cartridges through a CAP without using the Assign CAP Button screen it is recommended that you access the screen first to verify the partition settings This will help to prevent cartridges from being entered inadvertently into the wrong partition 1 Initiate the enter operation at the host See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 2 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 3 Expand the CAP Folder and click the CAP you want to use Note In a partitioned library only one CAP is listed in the Diagnostics CAP Folder The Import Export screen appears w Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 CAP CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Import Export Assign CAP Button capP 0 1 0 8 o 7 Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Operation a M Pahat Faldert NNN O Import cleanina diaanostic cartridaes 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 135 CAP Operation Tasks 4 Click the Assign CAP Button tab The Assign CAP Button screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 CAP car Folder 1 0 0 0 caP 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 o gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Assign CAP Button Assign CAP Button Partitions Assigned To This CAP Button Select the partition to be assigned to the CAPButton then click Apphy to make assignment Import Ex
69. Planning 94 Installing the Partitioning Feature 95 Allocated Storage Capacity 95 Partition Configurations 95 Partition Summary Information 95 Host Partition Connections 95 Partition Boundaries 96 Deleting the Partitioning Feature 98 Partitions and Library Resources 98 Library Resource Addresses 98 Library Internal Address 99 Host SCSI Element Address 99 vi SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Storage Cells and Drives 100 Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries 100 Partitions and CAPs 102 Common CAP 102 SplitCAP 102 CAP Operations 102 Partitioning Process 104 Partition Configuration Process 104 SL Console Partition Workspace 104 Partitioning Task Summary 106 Partition Configuration Tasks 107 Review Partitioning Instructions 108 Create a Partition 109 Configure a Host Partition Connection 111 Design a Partition 112 Verify Partition Configurations 114 Resolve Orphaned Cartridges 116 Commit Partition Configuration Changes 117 Partition Management Tasks 119 Modify Partition Summary Information 120 Delete a Partition 121 Modify Host Partition Connection Detail 123 Delete a Host Partition Connection 124 Refresh the SL Console Partition Workspace 126 Reallocate Library Resources 127 Make a Hardware Change to a Partitioned Library 128 Partition Report Tasks 129 Display a Partition Report 130 Print Partition Report Data 132 Save Partition Report Data 133 CAP Operation Tasks 134 Enter Cartr
70. Ready to Install K gt Java Product Sun Java System Web Server Java Location C Program FilesiSuniWebServer Enterprise Disk Space 239 79 MB System Administration Command Line Interface Server Core Sample Applications Language Pack for Server Core Language Pack for Administration Command Line Interface lt Back Install Now gt Cancel Help The installation begins and screen with a progress bar is displayed 8 On the Installation Complete screen review the information and write down the Administration Console URL specified in 2 under Next Steps You will need this in the next procedure Installation Complete Installation Successful Java Refer to the installation log file at Enterprise System C Program FilesiSuniWVvebServer isetup iSun_Java_System_VWeb_Server_install log for more details Next Steps 1 Start the Administration Server by executing CaProgram Files SunWWvebServer7iadmin serveribinistartsery 2 You can access the Administration Console by accessing the following URL httpsviC1 29684 louisville stortek com 8989 Click Finish to exit the installation program 9 Click Finish to exit the setup program 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 397 Server Installation and Management v Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console 1 Start the Sun Java System Web Server if it is not already
71. Start Sequence Start File gt Pause Sequence Pause Stops all diagnostic moves but maintains the current location in the access order File gt Stop Sequence Stop Stops a running or paused move File gt Start Sequence Resume Resumes a paused move starting with File gt Clear Output Window Spool File gt Start Spooling Spool File gt Stop Spooling Clear the messages displayed in the monitor window Spool Stop spooling the move output to a file the last known location in the target address range Erases the previous message lines and continues to fill the screen with new messages Directs the move output to a file Stops directing the move output to the spool file 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 325 Robot Utility Tasks 326 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 13 SNMP Support Simple Network Management Protocol is an application layer protocol that performs network management operations over an Ethernet connection using a User Datagram Protocol UDP IP The Simple Network Management Protocol allows m Libraries to inform the systems administrator of potential problems m Systems administrators to query the library for configuration operation and statistical information The SL500 libraries support m SNMPv2c read only support primarily for machine status queries With this version any information transmitted is not secure
72. Step 3 The Design tab allows you to add or remove resources such as cells drives or CAPs to the partition using a graphical cell map The Modify button will also direct you to a dialog box to modify the name and barcode presentation of the partition and then you can choose the Design tab to to modiatresources for a selected partition To delete an existing partition simply select a partiton from the Partition Summary table in the Summary tab and then click the Delete Partition button Note that making changes in the Design tab does not apply or commit the partition definitions changes to the library If you have completed defining or modifying your partitions you will need to go to the Commit tab Step 4 to apply changes to the library by using the Apply button This operation may be disruptive to the library Itis not necessary to do this separately for for each partition you can add or modify multiple partitions and then use the Commit tab to apply all of these changes as a single transaction For more detailed information about the operation of each of the tabs please refer to the Help for the selected tab Description Displays instructions for using the partition screens Note This screen appears automatically the first time you select Tools gt Partitions during an SL Console login session Screen Fields None Buttons Help Click to display online help for the screen 96116 Revision KB Chapte
73. Tasks 199 viii SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Display Library Status 200 Display Library Configuration Information 201 Set the Library Fibre Channel Port Address 202 Display Library Controller Properties 204 Display Library Physical Configuration 205 Display Library SCSI Configuration 206 Display Library Statistics 207 Display the Library Utilization Reports 208 7 CAP Management 211 CAP Operations 211 CAP Management Tasks 212 Display CAP Summary Information 213 Display Current CAP Status 214 Display CAP Properties 215 8 Drive Management 217 Drive Identification 217 Drive States 217 Drive Management Tasks 218 Display Drive Summary Information 219 Display Drive Status 220 Display Drive Properties 221 Enable or Disable a Drive Port 222 Display Current Drive Mappings 223 Display Drive Mapping History 225 Display the Media Drive Events Report 227 Display the Drive Distribution Reports 229 Display the Drive Utilization Reports 232 9 Cartridge Management 235 Recovery Moves 235 Cartridge Management Tasks 236 Enter Cartridges Through the CAP 237 Eject Cartridges Through the CAP 239 96116 Revision KB Contents ix List Library Cartridges 240 Move a Specified Cartridge by VOLID 242 Move a Cartridge From a Specified Location 246 10 Drive Cleaning 251 Cleaning Cartridges 251 Ejecting Expired Cleaning Cartridges 251 Managing Automatic Cleaning Through the SL Console 252 Manual Cleaning 252 Drive
74. Year The previous 52 weeks broken into weekly intervals The selected report is displayed with the first drive location displayed by default 232 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks 3 In the Select a drive pull down select the drive location library internal address you want to display The report is displayed for the selected drive location Tools Help Reports Search Update Save gt E Statistics Drive Utilization Last 24 Hours gt Ej Log gt c Status Summary Select a drive Start Dat Mount P t Utilizati r b a ate ounts ercen Hization gt Ga Version 11 16 09 6 00AM 18 13 81 a EI Drive Distribution 11 16 09 7 00AM 119 14 67 i 4 Drive Utilization 1116 09 8 00AM 18 13 78 Last 24 Hours 1171609 9 00AM 19 14 53 DY Last Month 11 16 09 10 00AM 18 13 75 11 16 09 11 00AM 19 14 58 C Last Year 11 1609 12 00PM 18 13 78 C Last Days 11 16 09 1 00PM 19 14 53 4 Library Utilization 11 16 09 2 00 PM 18 13 78 11 16 09 3 00PM 119 14 53 11 16 09 4 00PM 18 13 97 11 16 09 5 00PM 118 13 89 111609 6 00PM 19 14 53 1116 09 7 00PM 18 13 78 11 16 09 8 00PM 119 14 56 11 16 09 9 00PM 18 13 83 11 16 09 10 00PM 119 13 97 11 16 09 11 00PM 18 14 39 1117 09 12 00AM 19 13 92 11 17 09 1 00AM 18 14 53 1117 09 2 00AM 18 13 89 1117 09 3 00AM 19 14 56 1117109
75. Yes No Yes No Start Address End Address Type Cap v Type Cap v Library Library Module Module w OOOO Column Column Audit Console Audit started for the range from 0 1 1 8 to 0 1 1 8 0 1 1 8 EMPTY Audit completed for the range from 0 1 1 8 to 0 1 1 8 Note You can also view the Cartridge Summary report for the latest cartridge locations and VOLIDs See Display a Library Report on page 56 for details 306 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Audit Tasks v Perform a Verified Audit A verified audit validates the status of a specific cartridge location or a range of locations including CAPs and drives in the library controller database If a cartridge address has a verified status of false then a physical audit of that location is performed and the library controller database is updated 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics V gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Sae Restore Reboot DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelfTest RcvrMove TransferFile Library Monitor ne Monitor Console 3 Click the Audit tab The Library Audit screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics V Library 1 0 0 0 0 car Folder 1 0 0 0 0 caP 1 1 2 2 0
76. a Bl 3 L204_002 1 Base module 4 Standard power supply see note 1 2 Drive expansion module 5 Library power switch 3 Cartridge expansion module 6 Tape drive 1 in base unit see note 2 4 Redundant power supply see note 1 7 Tape drive 1 in expansion module see note 3 Notes 1 If you are ordered only one power supply in a module it should be installed in the top location 2 The host firmware sees tape drive 1 the SCSI firmware sees tape drive 0119 3 The host firmware sees tape drive 1 the SCSI firmware sees tape drive 0219 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 3 Library with LTO Storage Cells Library with LTO Storage Cells LTO Library Configurations Caution Firmware problems You can not mix LTO and mixed media arrays within the same library If you add expansion modules the new modules must have the same type arrays as the existing modules For each library m The Base Module contains the robotics unit and the base unit a The robotics unit has the robotic components and the keypad a The base unit has up to 50 storage cells see note one or two tape drives and a five cell cartridge access port CAP Note Only 30 of those storage cells can be used unless the cartridge upgrade conversion bill has been installed allowing the other 20 storage cells to be used With no upgrade the first 30 storage cells after the reserved cells can be used for cartridge storage If the rese
77. a Partition on page 112 for detailed instructions Caution Reallocating resources can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could be lost See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries on page 100 for details 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 127 Partition Management Tasks v Make a Hardware Change to a Partitioned Library Some library hardware changes such as adding expansion modules or adding CAP cells may require the removal of all or part of an existing partitioned module Use the following process to make such hardware changes without losing partitioning information for the sections of the library that are unchanged Caution Failure to follow this procedure could result in the loss of library partition configuration information after a hardware change 1 De allocate all library resources storage cells CAPs and drives that will be removed as part of the hardware change from the partitions they are currently allocated to See Design a Partition on page 112 for detailed instructions 2 Power down the library See Power Down the Library on page 503 for detailed instructions 3 Install the hardware change 4 Power up the library See Power Up the Library on page 504 for detailed instructions All partition allocations for the unchanged parts of the library remain in effect 5 Allocate the library resources that have been added due to the hardware cha
78. a Verified Audit 307 Drive Utility Tasks 309 Perform a Drive Self Test 310 Reboot a Drive 311 Robot Utility Tasks 313 Define a Diagnostic Move 314 Manage Diagnostic Move Definitions 318 Save a Diagnostic Move to a File 320 Start a Diagnostic Move 322 96116 Revision KB Contents xi Monitor and Control Open Diagnostic Moves 324 13 SNMP Support 327 Trap Levels 327 Port Control 328 Access Control 328 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks 329 Add SNMP Users 330 Delete SNMP Users 331 Add Trap Recipients 332 Delete Trap Recipients 333 Set Up Port Control 334 Transfer the Library MIB File 335 14 Manual Operations 337 Library Safety 337 Cards and Power Supply 337 Robotics 337 Front Door 337 Manual Operation Tasks 338 General Library Operation Tasks 339 Power Off the Library 340 Power On the Library 341 Return the Library to Ready Status 342 Open the Front Door With Power 343 Open the Front Door Without Power 344 Secure the Front Door With Power 346 Secure the Front Door Without Power 347 Cartridge Handling Tasks 348 Locate and Remove a Cartridge 349 Insert Cartridges into Storage Cells 350 Insert a Cartridge into a Tape Drive 352 Remove a Cartridge from a Tape Drive 353 Remove a Cartridge from the Gripper Assembly 355 xii SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Replace a Cleaning Cartridge 357 A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 359 LTO Configurations 360 Mixed Media Configurations
79. above to initiate cartridge move This move function is intended to move a Cartridge from its current location Source Location back to its original home location The Destination Location Source Location Destination Location Mode Type Cap v Location VOLID Library 246 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Management Tasks 3 In the Source Location Mode field click Location The screen is updated with the appropriate Source Location fields Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 car Folder 1 0 0 0 car 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 start_ Reboot la Library Load Code Activate Code DiagMove RECOVERY MOVE Choose source and destination location for move Then choose Start button above to initiate cartridge move This move function is intended to move a Cartridge from its current location Source Location back to its original home location The Destination Location Source Location Destination Location Mode Type Cap v Location VOLID Library Max Module Max K d Type Cap v Row Max v Library Min NA Column Max v Module Min A Row Min v Column Min Selffest RewMove TransferFile 4 In the Source Location Type pull down menu select the cartridge s current location type Options are ma CAP Slot C m Drive C
80. all partition configuration changes you have made during this SL Console session Failure to use this screen before logging out of the current SL Console session will cause all your library configuration changes to be lost Screen Fields None Buttons Apply Click to update the library controller database with the current settings from the SL Console partition workspace The Tools gt Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply popup appears indicating whether there are any orphaned cartridges or other errors in the current partition configuration Note This button is grayed out if you have not made any changes to the SL Console partition workspace since the last commit Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 Partitions Design Step 3 Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply Partitions Reports 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 169 Partition Design and Commit Screens Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply Sample Screen Confirm Apply x Warnings Found Some WVVPNs will need re audit Some hosts do not employ LUN 0 Cartridge data may be lost Print Save The following hosts will need to be reaudited 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following orphaned cartridges w
81. and Cartridge for Information Interchange ACS X3B5 Refer to your tape drive manufacturer s publication and Web site for specific cartridge requirements and specifications 376 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Ordering Cartridges and Labels Color cartridges are approved only if the measured reflection density is greater than 0 1 as measured by an X rite 404G color reflection densitometer For more information about colored cartridges contact your Oracle support representative Color measurements are Bandwidth ANSI Status T Wide band 380 to 780 nm Measuring range Density 0 00 to 2 50 D Accuracy 0 02 D Repeatability 0 01 D Aperture diameter 3 4 mm 0 13 in Ordering Cartridges and Labels Contact your authorized Selling Agent for Oracle branded labeled cartridges You do not need to order labels separately because the data cartridges have labels already and the cleaning and diagnostic labels are shipped with the installation hardware However you must select the VOLID range and other label options when ordering cartridges If you choose to order additional labels order them from any standard media vendor See Cartridge Requirements on page 376 before ordering 96116 Revision KB Appendix B Cartridge Information 377 LTO Ultrium Cartridges LTO Ultrium Cartridges The following sections describe LTO cartridges FIGURE B 1 LTO Cartridge Components
82. components of the SL500 library and library specifications The library continues Oracle StorageTek s approach to Information Lifecycle Management by providing a highly adaptable storage platform made to specifically consolidate protect and retain customer information The SL500 library protects a customer s investments by providing a cost effective entry point and makes it easy to grow the library with expansion modules Whether customers have a small remote site or a corporate data center they can feel secure that the SL500 library can accommodate all of their current and future data storage needs The library is a self contained fully automated tape cartridge storage system It is scalable and mounts into a standard 483 mm 19 in rack The SL500 is also available as a desk top unit 96116 Revision KB 1 Views and Locations Views and Locations The following figures show library views and the locations of components FIGURE 1 1 Front View of Library Components iR STORAGETEK L204_001 1 Base module 2 Drive expansion module 3 Library door 4 Drive expansion module cartridge access port CAP 5 Library door lock 6 Base unit cartridge access port CAP 7 Keypad assembly 8 Robotics unit 2 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Views and Locations FIGURE 1 2 Back View of Library Components i
83. contact your Oracle support representative for assistance 14 After the package is successfully unpacked you can activate the code immediately or wait until a later time See Activate Code on the Library Controller on page 300 for detailed instructions 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 299 Library Utility Tasks v Activate Code on the Library Controller Use this procedure to activate a version of library firmware currently residing in the library controller flash memory Up to two versions of firmware can be resident in memory at one time but only one can be active The active version is identified as running Prior to performing this procedure you must download and unpack the code you want to activate See Download Code to the Library Controller on page 298 for detailed instructions This procedure involves a reboot of the library You should schedule it for a time that is convenient for users You can restore the earlier firmware version if required 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics and click the Library folder 2 Click the Activate Code tab The Activate Code screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 p gt CAF Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Choose a target DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelfTest RewMove TransferFile Target SL500 Code lv
84. delete the Capacity license with sequence 146 Deleting capacity licenses could affect multiple modules The library must be rebooted for the capacity license to be completely removed Yes Delete Confirmation Nix A Are you sure you want to delete the MultiPortFibre Hardware Activation Key with sequence 104 5 Click Yes to begin the deletion The hardware activation file is deleted from the library and the Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary is updated Tools Help Hardware Activation Current Hardware Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Reboot Delete Refresh Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary Feature Sequence Number Value Enabled Partitioning 102 None No Capacity 99001 LimitedBase No Capacity 39002 FullBase No Capacity 39003 FullDEM No Capacity 39004 FullDEM No Capacity 39005 FullDEM No Canarite laanng Full End isto 6 You must reboot the library in order for the activation file deletion to take effect See Reboot the Library on page 296 for detailed instructions 7 Depending on the feature included in the hardware activation file you may need to perform additional tasks after deleting the key m See Decreasing Activated Capacity on page 91 for special considerations that apply when you delete a Capacity hardware activation file m See Deleting the Partitioning Feature on
85. feature to be activated Associated Module Capacity Activation Detail Module Number Display only Numeric module ID Possible values are 1 5 Capacity Display only Total module capacity that has been activated for use Possible values are a Full Capacity All storage cells in the module are activated for use a None No storage cells in the module have been activated for use May also indicate that the module is not installed in the library a 1 3 Capacity One third of the storage cells in the module have been activated Applies only to the DEM a 2 3 Capacity Two thirds of the storage cells in the module have been activated Applies only to the DEM Sequence Number Display only Hardware activation file sequence numbers used in providing the indicated capacity If more than one hardware activation file is involved the sequence numbers are separated by commas 000 indicates no hardware activation file has been installed for the module Cells Activated Display only 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 81 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Total number of storage cells in the library that have been activated for use This cannot be greater than the physical capacity of the library Cells Not Activated Display only Total number of storage cells in the library that have not been activated for use Total Number Of Cells Display only Total physical capacity of the library Button
86. file must be located on a system accessible to the SL Console session and the serial number specified in the file must match the serial number of the library you are logged in to 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 83 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Product Display only Type of library the hardware activation file is for For example SL3000 or SL500 Serial Number Display only Serial number of the library the hardware activation file is for This entry must match the serial number of the library you are logged in to in order for the hardware activation file to be valid for this library Sequence Display only Unique sequence number assigned to the hardware activation file by Oracle Corporation Note Sequence numbers 99000 and above are permanently retained and cannot be deleted from the library Comment Line 1 Display only Optional comment concerning the hardware activation file from Oracle Corporation Comment Line 2 Display only Optional comment concerning the hardware activation file from Oracle Corporation Activation File File Details Feature Display only Name of a feature included in the hardware activation file Expiration Display only Number of days until the feature is due to expire Because SL500 library features do not expire the value for this field is always N A Value Display only Qualification for the feature if applicable For example for the
87. into the tape library You can set the write protect switch so that the cartridge is read only nothing can be written on the tape Slide the switch to reveal the closed lock symbol In this position the tape drive can only read data from the tape but cannot write data to it FIGURE B 4 Set the LTO Write Protect Switch L204 021 1 Write protect switch data cartridge has red switch cleaning cartridge has gray switch 2 Write enabled 96116 Revision KB Appendix B Cartridge Information 381 LTO Ultrium Cartridges FIGURE B 4 Set the LTO Write Protect Switch 3 Write protected 382 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridges SDLT DLT S4 Cartridges Note Your robotics unit must be part number 314558705 or higher to read SDLT cartridge labels The following sections describe SDLT DLT S4 cartridges FIGURE B 5 SDLT Cartridge Components L204_564 1 Tape leader 2 SDLT cartridge identifier tab 3 Access door 4 Volume serial number VOLID label 5 Read Write protect switch Note DLTtape S4 cartridges are black in color See Quantum manuals for more information regarding DLTtape S4 cartridges Library firmware must be version 1126 or later for DLT S4 support For best results m Use Super DLTtape 1 cartridges in SDLT 320 tape drives m Use Super DLTtape 2 cartridges in SDLT 600 tape drives m Use DLTtape 54 cartridges in
88. location in the access order Stop File gt Stop Sequence Stops a running or paused exerciser Resume File gt Start Sequence Resumes a paused exerciser starting Clear the messages displayed in the monitor window Spool Stop spooling the exerciser output to a file File gt Clear Output Window Spool File gt Start Spooling Spool File gt Stop Spooling with the last known location in the target address range Erases the previous message lines and continues to fill the screen with new messages Directs the move output to a file Stops directing the move output to the spool file Note If multiple diagnostic moves are open then each move has its own monitor screen 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 279 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Before you run diagnostic tests check the following areas of the library using the troubleshooting tips in the following table TABLE 12 1 Troubleshooting Table Problem What to do Service Required Perform the following procedure amber LED is Using the SL Console check the health of the library and the attached constantly on devices drives CAPs and Robots See StorageTek Library Console on page 27 for more details about operations To perform a health check 1 Log in to the SL Console application 2 Access the System Detail module View gt System Detail 3 Check the device tree for the fol
89. magazines 8 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library with Mixed Media Storage Cells TABLE 1 2 Mixed Media Storage Cell and Tape Drive Capacities ar Number of Tape Total of CAP Storage Modules 2 6 10 14 18 Cells Cells Base module 24 4 28 18 cartridge upgrade 42 4 46 Adding 1 expansion module Base module plus 1 limited DEM 86 12 98 Base module plus 1 full DEM 119 12 131 with 33 cartridge upgrade Base module plus 1 CEM 140 12 152 Adding 2 expansion modules Base module plus 2 DEMs 189 20 209 Base module plus 1 DEM 1 CEM 210 20 230 Base module plus 2 CEMs 240 20 260 Adding 3 expansion modules Base module plus 3 DEMs 259 28 287 Base module plus 2 DEMs 1 CEM 280 28 308 Base module plus 1 DEM 2 CEMs 310 28 338 Base module plus 3 CEM 340 28 368 Adding 4 expansion modules Base module plus 4 DEMs 329 36 365 Base module plus 3 DEMs 1 CEM 350 36 386 Base module plus 2 DEMs 2 380 36 416 CEMs Base module plus 1 DEM 3 CEMs 410 36 446 Base module plus 4 CEMs 440 36 476 Adding Mixed Media Storage Cell Capacity If your needs have increased you can increase the storage cell capacity and the number of tape drives in the library TABLE 1 2 lists how many storage cells and tape drives can be gained by adding each Drive Expansion Module The expansion modules are installed into the same rack as the existing modul
90. media types 1 Select Tools gt Reports All library report options are listed in the navigation bar Tools Help Reports o J Statistics Display gt EI Log Display c gt c Status Detail o A Vereinn 2 Expand the Status Summary folder All Status Summary reports are listed Tools Help Reports EI Statistics Display gt E Log Display CI btatus Summary C Cartridge Table Bi CAP Summary R Cartridge Summary Bi Drive Summary Bi Library Information D Robot Summary o c Status Detail c version 240 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 3 Click Cartridge Summary The Cartridge Summary Report is displayed Cartridge Management Tasks Tools Help Reports gt cI Log gt c Statistics gt J Status Detail cf Status Summary QA CAP Summary C Cartridge D Drive Summary O Library Information C Robot Summary c Version Cartridge Summary Search Update save Generated on Tue Jul 01 11 16 33 MDT 2008 Location 0 1 6 1 Location Type cell Media Type Dit_Cleaning Type data Cartridge CLNO16C Location 0 1 4 1 Location Type cell Media Type LtoGen2_200GB Type data Cartridge ENGO08L2 Location 0 1 1 8 Location Type cap Media Type SDLT 1 Type data Cartridge DG 0085 Location 0 1 1 5 Location Type cell 4 If you want to search the report data or save it to a file
91. navigation 34 SL Console report tasks 55 61 SL Console reports Current Drive Mappings 223 Drive Distribution 229 Drive Mapping History 225 Drive Utilization 232 Library Utilization 208 Media Drive Events Report 227 Options Bar 32 types 32 SLC See SL Console SNMP access control 328 adding trap recipients 332 adding users 330 community strings support 328 defined 327 deleting trap recipients 333 deleting users 331 port control 328 setting up port control 334 SL500 supported versions 327 tasks 329 336 transferring the library MIB file 328 335 336 trap levels 327 specifications component weights 373 drive power 374 drive weights 373 environment 373 library clearances 372 library dimensions 371 power 374 standalone SL Console described 38 39 96116 Revision KB installing 63 68 installing updates 39 logging in 51 Standby indicator 14 storage cells wall diagrams 359 369 StorageTek Library Console See SL Console T tape drives See drives tape management software 25 troubleshooting 280 Ww wall diagrams Base Module LTO 361 Base Module mixed media 366 Cartridge Expansion Module LTO 364 Cartridge Expansion Module mixed media 369 LTO firmware mappings 362 LTO SCSI mappings 363 mixed media firmware mappings 367 mixed media SCSI mappings 368 Web launched SL Console client requirements 36 described 36 37 downloading the Java System Web Server 390 393 installation errors 414 installing on the server 401 406 i
92. page 98 for special considerations that 78 SL500 User s apply when you delete a Partitioning hardware activation file Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Hardware Activation Screen Reference This section includes detailed descriptions of all SL Console hardware activation file screens arranged by screen navigation path For example Activation File Management gt Install Activation File indicates the screen accessed by clicking Tools and then Hardware Activation from the Menu Bar and then clicking the Install Activation File tab Screen Hardware Activation gt Current Hardware Activation Keys 80 Hardware Activation gt Install Hardware Activation Keys 83 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 79 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Hardware Activation gt Current Hardware Activation Keys Sample Screen Delete Refresh Tools Help Hardware Activation Reboot Current Hardware Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary Feature Sequence Number Value Enabled Partitioning 102 INone Yes a MultiPortF ibre 104 2 Yes Capacity 99001 LimitedBase Yes Capacity 99002 FullBase Yes Capacity 99003 FulIDEM Yes Capacity 99004 FulIDEM Yes Canacite Iaanns Fume vac Associated Module Capacity Activation Detail
93. particular drive or cartridge is in need of maintenance or replacement By default the report is sorted in reverse chronological order that is by Date Time with the most recent entry at the top Optionally you can change the sort order and rearrange and resize the columns See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 1 Select Tools gt Reports 2 Expand the Statistics folder and click Media Drive Events Search Update save Lk Tools Help Reports 9 Statistics Bi Drive Mapping Current Bi Drive Mapping History C Media Drive Events gt cI Log gt C Status Summary gt c Status Detail gt c version CJ Drive Distribution gt EJ Drive Utilization EJ Library Utilization Media Drive Events v Date Time Drive Adr wolid Drive Serial Num Drive Type Exce 2009 10 127T09 48 11 161 0 3 3 9 ENO295L1 1210009115 IbmUltrium3 MediaEn 2009 10 12709 48 39 325 0 3 3 9 EN0295L1 1210009115 IbmUltrium3 MediaEn 2009 10 12T10 49 48 750 0 3 3 9 EN0295L1 1210009115 IbmUltrium3 MediaEn 2009 10 12710 50 16 913 0 3 3 9 ENO295L1 1210009115 IbmUltrium3 MediaEn 2009 10 12710 56 30 568 0 3 3 9 ENO295L1 1210009115 IbmUltrium3 _ MediaEn 2009 10 12710 56 58 692 0 3 3 9 ENO295L1 1210009115 IbmUltrium3 MediaEn Screen Fields Date Time Date and time the error occurred Drive Adr Location of the drive involved
94. partitions in the library Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Optionally you can print the screen data or save it to a comma separated file 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 187 Partition Report Screens Screen Fields Note These screen fields also appear on the Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary report Partition ID Display only ID of the partition 1 8 Partition Name Display only Name of the partition Cell Count Display only Total number of storage cells allocated to the partition Drive Count Display only Total number of tape drives allocated to the partition CAP Count Display only Total number of CAP cells allocated to the partition Cartridge Count Display only Total number of tape cartridges resident in the partition of Cells with Media Display only Percentage of storage cells containing tape cartridges Calculated as Cartridge Count Cell Count Buttons Print Click to print the report on a selected printer Save to
95. propagate the changes to all instances Deploy Cancel 404 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 8 On the Results screen click Close Sun Java System Web Server Results i The configuration has been deployed successfully to all available nodes 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 405 Server Installation and Management 9 The Web Applications screen displays a message that the application has been added successfully VERSION Home REFREsh_ Loc our HELP User admin Server C1 Sun Java System Web Server Configurations gt C129684 louisville stortek com gt Virtual Servers gt C129684 louisville stortek com Server Settings Web Applications Web Application Added Successfully C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server Web Applications This page lets you add web applications to the virtual server Web applications are added as web archive war files After adding the web application you need to deploy the configuration to propagate the added web applications to the instances The page also allows you to set single signon properties x Single Signon x Web Applications Single Signon Single Signon Enabled Session Idle Timeout 300 seconds 0 001 3600 Timeout after which user s single sign on records becomes eligible for purging if no activity is seen Use 1 fo
96. review the partitioning process 1 Select Tools gt Partitions The first time you make this selection during an SL Console login session the Instructions Step 1 screen appears automatically Tools Help Partitions instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Instructions for Adding Modifying or Deleting Partitions and their Host Connections To create modify or delete partitions first go to the Summary tab Step 2 This tab will allow you to view all current partitions on the library as well as their current connections This tab has buttons to add delete or modify the partitions Ifthe Add button is selected a dialog box will allow you to name the partition and select a barcode option and then you can select the Design tab Step 3 The Design tab allows you to add or remove resources such as cells drives or CAPs to the partition using a graphical cell map The Modify button will also direct you to a dialog box to modify the name and barcode presentation of the partition and then you can choose the Design tab to to modk resources for a selected partition To delete an existing partition simply select a partiton from the Partition Summary table in the Summary tab and then click the Delete Partition button Note that making changes in the Design tab does not apply or commit the partition definitions changes to the library If you have completed defining or modifying
97. running m On Windows Click Start gt All Programs gt Sun Microsystems gt Web Server 7 0 gt Start Administration Server m On Solaris Open a terminal window and type the following sudo opt webserver7 admin server bin startserv Note Wait several minutes for the server to start 2 Open a Web browser and in the Location Bar or Address field enter the URL you wrote down at the end of the previous procedure Install the Sun Java System Web Server This will start the Admin Console 3 In the popup accept the server certificate and click OK Website Certified by an Unknown Authority x Unable to verify the identity of c129684 louisville stortek com as a trusted site Possible reasons for this error Your browser does not recognize the Certificate Authority that issued the site s certificate The site s certificate is incomplete due to a server misconfiguration You are connected to a site pretending to be c129684 louisville stortek com possibly to obtain your confidential information Please notify the site s webmaster about this problem Before accepting this certificate you should examine this site s certificate carefully Are you willing to to accept this certificate For the purpose of identifying the Web site 129684 louisville stortek com Examine Certificate Accept this certificate permanently Accept this certificate temporarily For this session Do not accept th
98. see the following procedures m Display a Library Report on page 56 m Save Library Report Data to a File on page 60 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management Cartridge Management Tasks v Move a Specified Cartridge by VOLID Use this procedure to move a cartridge with a specified VOLID to a specified location within the library Note This procedure updates the cartridge s location in the library controller database but not in the host database Therefore after performing this procedure you must perform an audit from the host software to update the host database Failure to do so will cause future mount requests from the host software to fail Caution Use caution when performing this procedure in partitioned libraries You could inadvertently move a cartridge from one partition to another allowing the new partition to overwrite data on the cartridge 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics and click the Library folder 2 Click the RevrMove tab The Recovery Move screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Start Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library cap Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest I RewMove TransferFile caP 0 1 0 8 Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 RECOVERY MOVE Choose source and destination location for move Then choose Start button above to initiate cartridge move This move function is intended to move a be
99. service representatives Note The information relates specifically to the SL Console only For information about library hardware tape drives or host software see the appropriate product publication Following is a sample SL Console Help screen 01 x SS gt EOE SL Console Help StorageTek Library Conso G Introduction G SL Console Modes CI SL Console Security gt cJ SL Console Screen Di gt C Local Operator Panel a gt The SL Console Help displays information for SL3000 library opera __ system programmers system administrators and service represer Lil ote The information relates specifically to the SL Console only F information about library hardware tape drives or host software se appropriate product publication gt J Standalone SL Consol Following is a sample 8L Console Help screen gt 4 Web launched SL Con aN I gt CI SL Console Reports c CI SL Console Help SL3000 Automated Library gt cI Automated Mode of Opx 4 DEE r Th Rasal in 1 aare Cna apaLle 3732 0 un Laoi a luca Leie Dha tabuny ahn amber vic wot 1718 _30UL ame as well as amele ICHIP 2nneced Irre duction C Asoutthe sires nLine n 3 Avuul the StresynLine SLE Accessing the SL Console Help You can display the SL Console Help from any SL Console screen Use either of the follow
100. settings ALLOW and PREVENT ALLOW is the default setting after you power on or reset the library The following table shows how these settings affect the CAPs For CAP LED indicator information see Controls and Indicators on page 10 CAP Condition ALLOW PREVENT All of the CAPs are closed When you press the CAP button When you press the CAP all of the CAPs in the rack will button the action is ignored and open all of the CAPs remain closed The library firmware turns on the CAP LED Any of the CAPs are open When you press the CAP When you press the CAP button any CAP that is not button the action is ignored and open in the rack will open all of the CAPs remain in their individual current state of open or closed Robotics Unit The robotics unit provides movement of cartridges among the storage cells tape drives and cartridge access ports CAPs The three main robotic components are as shown in FIGURE 1 4 m Z drive assembly m X table assembly m Hand assembly The Z drive assembly uses the Z drive pulley to move the X table up and down to the desired storage cell or tape drive At the same time the X carriage assembly containing the hand moves the hand forward and backward the wrist motor rotates the hand right and left 18 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robotics Unit The hand assembly contains the wrist hub assembly gripper assembly and bar code scanner The gripper ass
101. so that it will not be pinched when the door locking lever extends as shown in the lower picture 3 While using one hand to move the robotics park lever to the left use your other hand to unlock the door with the key 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 345 General Library Operation Tasks v Secure the Front Door With Power To secure the front door when library power exists push it closed and use the key to lock it 346 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General Library Operation Tasks v Secure the Front Door Without Power To secure the front door when no library power exists 1 Remove the robotic facade from the top of the library by gently pulling the facade from side to side to pull the ball studs away from the clips You might have to use a screwdriver to gently pry it off Caution Possible component damage Note the door locking lever protruding from the top of the door Do not let it hit the robotics park lever when you close the door i 2 While using one hand to move the robotics park lever to the left use your other hand to close the door 3 While still holding the door shut release the robotics park lever 4 Use the key to lock the door 5 The robotics lever automatically moves to the right when the door locking lever retracts 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 347 Cartridge Handling Tasks Cartridge Handling Task
102. tape drive slots available depending on the type and number of modules installed The table assumes that when DEMs and CEMs are installed in the same library the DEMs are above all of the CEMs as preferred Note Do not install an EZ DEM below an original CEM This is not physically allowed The following notes are factors that influence capacity 1 When you add an expansion module below an existing module you increase the capacity of the module directly above it by a Base module 16 storage cells a CEM when another CEM is below it 10 storage cells a DEM 7 storage cells 2 When a CEM is installed below a Base Module or DEM the top two rows on columns 9 10 and 11 of the CEM are not accessible 6 storage cells because the tape drives prevent the hand from reaching the cells 3 The lowest module in the rack requires installation of the floor The floor limits the distance the robot can travel which makes the bottom row s in the lowest module inaccessible a Base module 16 storage cells a DEM 7 storage cells a CEM below another CEM 16 storage cells 10 storage cells on the lowest CEM 6 storage cells on the CEM above it a CEM below Base Module or DEM 16 storage cells 4 Cartridge access ports a Base module 5 storage cells one magazine a Each DEM 10 storage cells two magazines a Each CEM 10 storage cells two magazines TABLE 1 1 LTO Storage Cell and Tape Drive Capacities
103. that corresponds to your server platform amp Sun Sun Downloads Home gt Download Center Download Download Center Sun Java System Web Server 7 0 Update 1 Sun Java System Web Server 7 0 Update 1 is a secure massively scalable and stable platform for the most demanding web sites It features outof box support for Java technologies SSL clusters an integrated search engine and much more Update Account NOTE This page offers files for different platforms please be sure to download the proper file s for your platform Log Out We highly recommend using Sun Download Manager SDM as it lets you pause resume and restart your download while ensuring a successful download experience Just select the files you want to download then click the Download Selected with Sun Download Manager button to automatically install and start SDM Alternately click directly on the links in the file list to download through your browser For any download problems or questions please see the Download Center FAQ How long will the download take Download selected with Sun Download Manager Easily manage your downloads pause resume restart verify Learn more Solaris 10 OS AMD x64 Solaris 8 9 10 SPARC Solaris 9 10 x86 Platform Sun Java System Web Server 7 0 Update 1 fer 7 0 Update 1 Spare Multi language siows 7_Out solaris sparctar az 144 09 MB SunJa er 7 0 Update 1 AMD x6 6 Multi language sisws
104. to assign the CAP Open button on the library control panel After using this screen the following actions occur when you press the CAP Open button m The library opens the doors of all CAPs containing cells accessible to the partitions selected on this screen m The library sends CAP status messages to all hosts with access to the exposed cells Doors to CAPs that contain only inaccessible cells do not open Doors to CAPs with cartridges in inaccessible cells do not open Note Depending on how your library s CAPs are configured this operation may expose CAP cells that are not accessible to the requesting host s partition 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 191 Partition CAP Operation Screens Note Although it is possible to enter cartridges through a CAP without using the Assign CAP Button screen it is recommended that you access the screen first to verify the partition settings This will help to prevent cartridges from being entered inadvertently into the wrong partition See Enter Cartridges Into a Partitioned Library on page 135 and Enter Cartridges Into a Partitioned Library on page 135 for complete details on using this screen in conjunction with the CAP Open button Screen Fields Partitions with common CAP configuration Required Partitions with access to common CAP cells are displayed in this table in black type Partitions that have not been configured are grayed o
105. to determine which components such as tape drives component failed and replace the failed component The library has stopped operating The service representative might need to check the log_error file for the result code and perform the appropriate action 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 13 Controls and Indicators RLC Card Indicators The following table describes the RLC card indicators TABLE 1 7 RLC Card Indicators Indicator Description EJECT OK Indicator LED is solid blue when the RLC card can be removed Currently only one RLC card is available FAULT Indicator LED flashes red when the controller has detected a problem STANDBY Indicator LED is yellow when the RLC card is not the active card Currently only one RLC card is available ACTIVE Indicator LED is solid green when the RLC card is the active card Currently only one RLC card is available 14 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Tape Drives and Cartridges Tape Drives and Cartridges The library supports m Linear Tape Open LTO Ultrium tape drives a Hewlett Packard LTO Gen 2 3 and 4 check availability for Gen 4 SCSI low voltage differential LVD and Fibre Channel FC a IBM LTO Gen 2 3 and 4 check availability for Gen 4 SCSI LVD and FC m Quantum SDLT tape drives a SDLT 320 SCSI LVD a SDLT 600 SCSI LVD and FC a DLT S4 SCSI and FC Tape drives are hot swappable
106. usage count exceeds its limit you must replace it with a new one You can use the SL Console to eject the cleaning cartridge to the CAP To replace a cleaning cartridge 1 Open the door 2 Remove the expired cleaning cartridge from its reserved cell 3 Insert the new cleaning cartridge into that cell Note Refer to TABLE B 1 to make sure your cartridge has the correct vendor and usage label 4 Close the library door The SL Console status display shows that initialization tests are running 5 Wait until the initialization tests complete before you perform another task 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 357 Cartridge Handling Tasks 358 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 APPENDIX A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications This appendix provides the following diagrams and tables m LTO Configurations on page 360 m Mixed Media Configurations on page 365 m Specifications on page 370 Use the legend in TABLE A 1 for all diagrams in this appendix Note Your tape management software might conflict with the following information Refer to your software publication for unique information TABLE A 1 Cell Figure Legend Storage cells available for customer data cartridge Cells reserved for cleaning and diagnostic cartridges can be configured for data cartridges Cells only available when an expansion module is installed If this is
107. utility Partitioning established on a library prior to version 1300 is retained permanently See Hardware Activation Files for details Note ACSLS does not support partitioning on the SL500 library Enabling and Disabling Partitioning In order for you to use partitions in a library the partitioning feature must be enabled by your Oracle CSE Contact your Oracle CSE for assistance A library with partitioning enabled can be in either of the following states m Partitioned The library has at least one user defined partition with a valid partition ID Non partitioned The library has no user defined partitions A non partitioned library behaves in the same manner as a library that does not have partitioning enabled that is all storage cells drives and CAPs are accessible to all hosts To disable partitioning on a library you must first delete all partitions The library state will then change to non partitioned Partition Planning The partitioning feature offers great flexibility in the use of your library It also requires careful planning a thorough knowledge of library wall and storage cell mapping and expertise in configuring and administering host software applications There must be clear communication among all parties involved including system programmers and administrators library operators and your Oracle service representative Before creating partitions you must plan the storag
108. why the cartridge is orphaned Buttons Print Click to print the report on a selected printer Save Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 171 Partition Design and Commit Screens Yes Click to confirm that you want to update the library controller database with the current settings from the SL Console workspace No Click to cancel the update The library controller database is not updated but all partition changes from this login session are retained in the SL Console partition workspace Details Click to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the warning message display See Also m Partitions Commit Step 4 m Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results Click to refresh the display with current data from the library controller database 172 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report Partitions Reports Partition Details Partitions Reports Partition Summary 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 173 Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports
109. your partitions you will need to go to the Commit tab Step 4 to apply changes to the library by using the Apply button This operation may be disruptive to the library Itis not necessary to do this separately for for each partition you can add or modify multiple partitions and then use the Commit tab to apply all of these changes as a single transaction For more detailed information about the operation of each of the tabs please refer to the Help for the selected tab 2 Review the instructions on the screen before proceeding with other partitioning tasks 108 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Configuration Tasks v Create a Partition Use this procedure to create a new library partition and assign its storage capacity You can create up to eight partitions with IDs from 1 8 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Summary Step 2 tab The Summary Step 2 screen appears Tools Help Partitions Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition Summary Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated SLU CBBC skk Storage Cells CAP Cells Drives 8 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125 Drives 4 CAP cells ia Resources Unallocated Storage Cells 224 Add Partition Delete Partition Modify Partition Drives 4 CAP cells 24 2 lick Add Partition The Add Partition popup appears
110. 0 Library gt CAP Folder1000 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RcvrMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 o Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Manage Monitor E DriveDiagMove1 File Spool File J E cap Move 1 File Spool File 28 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 2008 Sequence CAP Move 1 starting Sequence CAP Move 1 started Initial move from 0 1 1 2 to 0 1 1 8 succe Return move from 0 1 1 8 to 0 1 1 2 succes Sequence CAP Move 1 pause request received Initial move from 0 1 2 1 to 0 1 2 8 succe Return move from 0 1 2 8 to 0 1 2 1 succes Sequence CAP Move 1 paused Sequence CAP Move 1 stop request received Sequence CAP Move 1 stopped mao Spooling Status false State Stopped Health OK Completed Moves 2 10 Each monitor window has the following status indicators Status Indicators Description Valid Values Spooling Status Indicates if the move output is being True False spooled to a file State Current execution state of the move Running pausing paused stopping stopped Health Current health state of the move OK warning error Completed moves Number of moves completed in the requested move count 324 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks 3 Use the File menu in each Monitor window to perform any of the following functions Select Option To Notes File gt
111. 009115 gt cJ Status Detail gt cJ version gt CJ Drive Distribution gt cJ Drive Utilization gt cJ Library Utilization 4 gt Screen Fields Drive Slot Display only Drive slot number Slots are numbered 1 5 from top to bottom of the rack 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 225 Drive Management Tasks Change Date Display only Date and time the mapping change occurred Drive Address Display only Library internal address of the drive installed in the slot Format is m r c where a l for non partitioned libraries this is the library ID always 0 for partitioned libraries this is the partition ID 1 8 m module number 1 5 from top to bottom of the rack a r drive row number 1 2 Base Module or 1 4 Drive Expansion Module from top to bottom of the module c column number always 9 for drives Serial Number Display only Serial number of the drive installed in the drive slot 226 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks v Display the Media Drive Events Report Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1200 and SL Console version 3 30 The Media Drive Events Report lists the 100 most recent library media access errors The report is updated whenever a drive is not able to perform a load unload read or write operation on a cartridge You can use the report to help determine whether a
112. 1 Specifications FIGURE A 10 Library and Rack Clearances 1 SERVICE AREA TOP VIEW OF LIBRARY seened SERVICE AREA L204_235 1 60 9 cm 2 ft minimum service clearance behind the library or rack 2 81 0 cm 31 9 in depth of Base Module from front mounting plane to back of tape drives 3 76 2 cm 30 0 in depth of original design Base Module 71 4 cm 28 1 in depth of EZ install Base Module with optional extensions depths up to 94 cm 37 in 4 3 8 cm 1 5 in depth of front door required clearance 5 5 3 cm 2 1 in depth of front door and unique latch hardware 6 24 1 cm 9 5 in front door opening clearance 7 60 9 cm 2 ft minimum front service clearance 372 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Specifications Library Component Weights The following table lists the weights of the library tape drives and trays and cartridges TABLE A 2 Library Component Weights Component Weight Base module with 1 power supply 2 LTO tape drives and robotics unit 44 5 kg 98 0 1b Drive expansion module DEM with one power supply and four LTO 41 3 kg 91 0 Ib tape drives Cartridge expansion module CEM 20 1 kg 44 2 1b Robotics unit 10 1 kg 22 2 1b Power supply 2 3 kg 5 1 Ib HP LTO Ultrium tape drive and tray assy 3 6 kg 7 9 1b IBM LTO Ultrium tape drive and tra
113. 1 1 7 EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY 000161L2 EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY EMPTY completed for the range from 0 1 1 7 to 0 1 1 8 Essays 308 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Utility Tasks 96116 Revision KB Drive Utility Tasks Task Page Perform a Drive Self Test 310 Reboot a Drive 311 Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 309 Drive Utility Tasks v Perform a Drive Self Test 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Expand the Drive Folder and click the drive you want to test 3 Click the SelfTest tab Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Selffest Clean gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Drive 0 1 2 9 Drive 0 2 1 9 Drive 0 2 3 9 Drive 0 2 4 9 Drive 0 3 1 9 Drive 0 3 2 9 Drive 0 3 4 9 o Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Diagnostic Console 4 In the Mode pull down click Non Disruptive 5 Click the Run button from the Options Bar Status messages are displayed as the self test is run A Diagnostic completed message appears when the test finishes 310 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Utility Tasks v Reboot a Drive Use this procedure to reboot a drive 1 Select Tools gt
114. 116 Partitioning Process Information in the SL Console partition workspace is committed to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen The information is lost if any one of the following occurs before you have committed your updates m You actively log off the SL Console session m The SL Console session times out or the connection to the library is lost m You actively refresh the SL Console workspace from the current library controller database This is done through the Refresh button on the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 105 Partitioning Task Summary Partitioning Task Summary Partitioning tasks are divided into the following categories Partition Configuration Tasks on page 107 Partition Management Tasks on page 119 Partition Report Tasks on page 129 CAP Operation Tasks on page 134 106 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Configuration Tasks Partition Configuration Tasks Task Page Review Partitioning Instructions 108 Create a Partition 109 Configure a Host Partition Connection 1i Design a Partition 112 Verify Partition Configurations 114 Resolve Orphaned Cartridges 116 Commit Partition Configuration Changes 117 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 107 Partition Configuration Tasks v Review Partitioning Instructions Use this procedure to
115. 131 Partition Report Tasks v Print Partition Report Data Use this procedure to print a partition report This procedure can be performed from any of the partition report screens 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Reports tab The Reports screen appears Tools Help Partitions Refresh b Instructions Step 1 Surmimary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 i Reports 2 In the pull down menu select any report The specified report is displayed All report screens include the Print and Save to File buttons Print Save To File 3 Click Print The Print popup appears General Page Setup Appearance Print Service Name HP LaserJet 3050 Series PCL 6 mA Properties Status Accepting jobs Type mo C Print To File Print Range Copies Sa Number of copies H Pages To Vv Collate 4 Complete the print popup and click Print The report is printed to the selected printer 132 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Tasks v Save Partition Report Data Use this procedure to save partition report data to a comma separated file csv format You can use a variety of spreadsheet applications to view the file This procedure can be performed from any of the partition report screens 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Reports tab The Reports screen appears Tools Help P
116. 16 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 45 General SL Console Usage Tasks 7 Scroll down to read the complete license agreement Click I accept the terms of the License Agreement and then click OK The SL Console Login screen appears Ro Sun storacetek LIBRARY CONSOLE User ID Password 8 Enter your login information and click Log on User ID SLC_login Password password Library library_ID where m SLC_login is the SL Console user ID m password is the password assigned to this user ID m library_ID is the library to which you want to connect expressed in either of the following ways a IP address of the library in dotted decimal notation nnn nnn nnn nnn a DNS alias of the library Note The user ID you use determines the screens you can access See SL Console Security on page 28 46 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks v Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using an Icon Note In order to perform this activity you must first save the Web launched SL Console slc Jjnlp file to your client See Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using a Browser or Command Line on page 42 for details 1 Double click the slc jnlp desktop icon on your client The Web Start process retrieves the Web launched SL Console application from the server Any updates are downloaded automatically The SL Console Laun
117. 365 Specifications 370 Library Component Weights 373 Library Environment 373 Power Specifications 374 B Cartridge Information 375 Handling Cartridges 375 Inspecting Cartridges 376 Maintaining Cartridges 376 Cartridge Requirements 376 Ordering Cartridges and Labels 377 LTO Ultrium Cartridges 378 Valid Labels 378 Write protect Switch 381 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridges 383 Valid Labels 384 Write Protect Switch 386 Cartridge Handling Tasks 387 Apply a Label to a Cartridge 388 C Web launched SL Console Server 389 Security Considerations 389 Server Requirements 389 Server Installation and Management 390 v Download the Java System Web Server 390 Install the Sun Java System Web Server 394 Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console 398 Install and Deploy the Web launched SL Console 401 Start the Web launched SL Console 407 Update the Web launched SL Console 409 96116 Revision KB Contents xiii Common Problems and Solutions 414 Windows 2000 Sun Java System Web Server Installation Errors 414 Windows MSVCP60 dll Error 414 v Remedy for Windows MSVCP60 dll Error 415 Solaris 9 amp 10 Sun Java System Web Server Installation Errors 416 Java Home Error 416 v Remedy for Solaris Java Home Error 416 Index 419 xiv SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Figures FIGURE 1 1 FIGURE 1 2 FIGURE 1 3 FIGURE 1 4 FIGURE 1 5 FIGURE 1 6 FIGURE 5 1 FIGURE 9 1 FIGURE 14 1 FIGURE
118. 400AM 18 13 75 1117 09 5 00AM 19 14 47 4 gt Screen Fields Select a drive Library internal address of the drive you want to display Format is m r c where a l for non partitioned libraries this is the library ID always 0 for partitioned libraries this is the partition ID 1 8 m module number 1 5 from top to bottom of the rack a r drive row number 1 2 Base Module or 1 4 Drive Expansion Module from top to bottom of the module c column number always 9 for drives Start Date Display only Starting date and time for each interval Mounts Display only Total number of cartridge mounts initiated during the selected time period 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 233 Drive Management Tasks Percent Utilization Display only Percentage of time the drive was busy during the time interval For example a value of 25 70 means the drive was busy 25 7 percent of the time The value is calculated as follows Seconds busy total seconds in time period 234 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 9 Cartridge Management All library cartridges must have a readable external label See Appendix C Cartridge Handling for details If you place an unlabeled cartridge into a storage cell manually the Robot leaves it there during a hardware audit and does not attempt to place another cartridge into the slot The library controller w
119. 500 Users Guide June 2010 P partitioned library See library partitions partitions See library partitions passwords modifying 54 physical capacity 88 LTO storage cells and drives 5 mixed media storage cells and drives 9 power specifications 374 power supply indicators 10 location 3 redundant 3 power switch 3 powering off the library 340 powering on the library 341 R ready status returning the library to 342 reboot drive 311 library 296 recovery moves 235 RLC card indicators 14 robot described 265 description 20 diagnostic moves See diagnostic moves monitoring tasks 266 269 statistics 269 status of 268 summary information 267 utility tasks 313 325 S safety features 23 safety precautions 337 SCSI addressing LTO locations 363 mixed media locations 368 SCSI properties displaying 206 SDLT DLT S4 cartridges codes 385 labels 384 385 media compatibility 17 media identifier 17 write protect switch 386 self tests drive 310 library 272 290 293 Revision KB 96116 Service Required indicator 13 Service Robot indicator 12 SL Console activation password 28 communications failures 198 described 27 first time access 28 layout of screen 29 logging off 53 login IDs 28 modes 27 modifying passwords 54 modifying the screen display 30 partition workspace and 104 126 168 security 28 standalone See standalone SL Console Web launched See Web launched SL Console SL Console Help accessing 34 described 34
120. 58 task summary 106 using CAPs with 102 verifying 114 165 library reboot 296 library reports 32 33 displaying 56 saving data to a file 60 searching 58 library self tests 272 performing 290 293 library statistics displaying 207 Index 421 library status displaying 200 library utility tasks 289 301 Library Utilization Reports 208 login IDs 28 LTO cartridges 378 381 codes 379 labels 378 380 write protect switch 381 LTO configuration Base Module wall diagrams 361 Cartridge Expansion Module wall diagrams 364 library internal addressing 362 library SCSI addresses 363 M main access door automated mode and 196 Management Information Base See MIB file manual cleaning drive 252 manual operations cartridge handling 348 357 closing the front door power off 347 closing the front door power on 346 general 339 347 opening the front door power off 344 opening the front door power on 343 powering off the library 340 powering on the library 341 returning the library to ready status 342 safety precautions 337 tasks 338 357 Media Drive Events Report 227 media drive compatibility LTO 16 SDLT DLT S4 17 MIB file transfer process 335 336 mixed media configuration Base Module wall diagrams 366 Cartridge Expansion Module wall diagrams 369 library internal addresses 367 library SCSI addresses 368 mount operations 195 O orphaned cartridges non partitioned libraries and 90 partitioned libraries and 100 116 182 422 SL
121. 8 health indicators 197 HLI PRC address drive slot 217 host interfaces partitioned libraries and 123 124 149 151 152 J Java System Web Server downloading 390 393 installing 394 397 logging in to the console 398 400 L Library Active indicator 12 library addressing partitioned libraries and 98 99 96116 Revision KB library configuration displaying 201 205 Library Console See SL Console library controller properties 204 library events 271 library events See Also event monitors library firmware upgrades 273 activating 300 downloading 298 library internal address partitioned libraries and 98 99 library internal addressing 4 7 LTO locations 362 mixed media locations 367 library management tasks 199 209 library partitions activated capacity and 91 allocated capacity 95 boundaries of 96 committing 117 168 170 configuration requirements 93 configuration tasks 104 107 118 creating 109 154 deleting 121 156 deleting the Partitioning feature 98 described 93 design and commit screen reference 159 172 designing 96 112 160 features of 93 hosts and 93 95 111 123 124 149 151 152 installing the Partitioning feature 95 library hardware changes and 128 library resources and 100 127 modifying summary information 120 157 orphaned cartridges in 100 116 182 planning 94 97 printing reports 132 reports 129 133 173 189 saving reports 133 SL Console workspace and 104 126 168 summary screen reference 142 1
122. Cancel Description Allows you to modify the name or barcode format of the selected partition This screen is a popup that appears when you click Modify Partition on the Partitions Summary Step 2 screen Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Modify Partition 7 Display only ID of the partition you want to modify Name Required Name you want to assign to the partition 0 60 ASCII characters The screen displays the value assigned previously You can leave it as is or make changes 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 157 Partition Summary Screens Barcode Presentation Tape cartridge bar code format to be used for the Partition The screen displays the value assigned previously You can leave it as is or make changes The drop down menu displays all available formats previously defined by your Oracle support representative the default is Left 6 label characters Buttons OK Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings and return to the previous screen
123. Cells 224 Add Partition Delete Partition Modify Partition Drives 4 CAP cells 24 Name Partition 1 Barcode Presentation Left 6 label characters Default Connections 20 00 00 40 BD 08 04 00 Add Connection Delete Connection Modify Connection 2 delete a connection 3 In the Connections section click the host partition connection you want to delete 4 Click Delete Connection A confirmation popup appears Ml et Are you sure that you want to delete the connection 124 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Management Tasks 5 Click OK to confirm the deletion Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace for the duration of this login session To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login session see Verify Partition Configurations on page 114 and Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 125 Partition Management Tasks v Refresh the SL Console Partition Workspace Use this procedure to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the library controller database The current data includes all updates that other users have made to the library controller database during your login session through the command line interface other SL Console sessions or host applications
124. Cleaning Tasks 253 Configure Drive Auto Clean 254 Enter Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges 256 Eject Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges 258 Display Cleaning Cartridges 260 Display Drive Cleaning Status 261 Clean a Drive Manually 262 11 Robot Management 265 Robotics Unit 265 Robot Procedures 265 Robot Monitoring Tasks 266 Display Robot Summary Information 267 Display Robot Status 268 Display Robot Statistics 269 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 271 Library Events 271 Event Monitors 271 Library Self Tests 272 Library Firmware Upgrades 273 Firmware Upgrade Process 273 Firmware Download Site 273 Multiple Versions of Firmware 273 Related Procedures 274 Audits 275 x SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Physical Audit 275 Verified Audit 276 Robot Diagnostic Moves 277 Target Address Range 277 Pool Address Range 278 Move Access Order 278 Sequential Access Order 278 Random Access Order 278 Diagnostic Move Control Functions 279 Troubleshooting 280 Diagnostic and Utility Tasks 282 Event Monitor Tasks 283 Display an Event Monitor 284 Spool Event Monitor Data to a File 286 Display Multiple Monitors 288 Library Utility Tasks 289 Perform a Non Disruptive Library Self Test 290 Perform a Disruptive Library Self Test 293 Reboot the Library 296 Download Code to the Library Controller 298 Activate Code on the Library Controller 300 Audit Tasks 302 Audit the Entire Library 303 Audit a Range of Cells 305 Perform
125. Definitions Use this procedure to manage diagnostic move sequence definitions 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 C DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Selffest RewrMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Manage Monitor Monitor Console 3 Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 pLi amp CaP Folder 1 0 0 0 Load Code Activate Code SelfTest RcvrMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Manage Monitor Sequence Monitor Console Defined Sequences DriveDiagMove 1 Drive Min Min Min Min lt gt Max Max Max Max Storage Slot gt Status State Stopped CompletedMoves 0 Number of sequences running 0 318 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks 4 From the Defined Sequences section select any of the following options Select Option To Notes Add Define a diagnostic move Open Start a diagnostic move Multiple diagnostic moves may be open at a time so long as the target and pool address ranges setup for the moves do not o
126. Diagnostics 2 Expand the Drive Folder and click the drive you want to modify Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Selffest Clean amp CAP Folder t 0 0 0 Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Drive Folder1 0 0 0 O omweo128 Mode Drive 0 2 1 9 Diagnostic Console Drive 0 2 3 9 Drive 0 2 4 9 Drive 0 3 1 9 Drive 0 3 2 9 Drive 0 3 4 9 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 3 Click Reboot in the Options Bar If the drive is offline the Offline Confirm popup appears SLConsole Offline x 5 f G Drive 0 2 1 9 is currently online Do you want to take it offline ox 4 Click OK to vary the drive offline The Reboot Confirm popup appears A Do you want to reboot Drive 0 2 1 97 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 311 Drive Utility Tasks 5 Click OK The library controller reboots the drive and the Reboot Success popup appears SLConsole Reboot xi Reboot successfully issued for Drive 0 2 1 9 6 Click OK to dismiss the popup 312 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks Robot Utility Tasks Task Page Define a Diagnostic Move 314 Manage Diagnostic Move Definitions 318 Save a Diagnostic Move to a File 320 Start a Diagnostic Move 322 Monitor and Control Open Diagnostic Moves 324 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics a
127. Documentation ___ View Online Documentation kij 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 407 Server Installation and Management 3 On the Configuration Instances screen click the checkbox next to the local instance of the Web launched SL Console server and click Start User admin Server C1 34 ne Running 0 Sun Java System Web Server nstance s Stopped 1 Configurations gt C129684 louisville stortek com C129684 louisville stortek com Configuration Instances View Logs Instance refers to the environment of a web server daemon on a given node including its configuration log files and other runtime artifacts such as lock databases caches and temporary files An instance can be started stopped dynamically re configured or deleted You can perform all these actions from this page The View Server Logs button brings up a popup that displays the logs for the instances on various nodes If there are no instances then the button is disabled New star _stop _Restart Reconfigure Detete Instance zy Node A Instance State a Vv https C129684 louisville stortek com 0129684 Jouisville stortek com Not Running The Web launched SL Console application instances are started and screen with a progress bar is displayed 4 On the Results screen click Close Sun Java System Web Server Results Instance s Started Successfully 408 SL500 User
128. Failures If the SL Console loses communication with the library controller after about 30 60 seconds the heartbeat monitor turns gray then red and the following error message appears Heartbeat message not received from the library controller You must log off from the SL Console and then log on again to restore communication 198 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Management Tasks Library Management Tasks Task Page Display Library Status 200 Display Library Configuration Information 201 Set the Library Fibre Channel Port Address 202 Display Library Controller Properties 204 Display Library Physical Configuration 205 Display Library Statistics 207 Display the Library Utilization Reports 208 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library Management 199 Library Management Tasks v Display Library Status Use this procedure to view the current operational state of the library These values are updated whenever there is host activity background operations or operator activity Note This information is also available through Reports gt Library Details See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Click the Status tab The screen displays the current status of the library Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh VA Library 1 0 0 0 Library CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Status
129. File Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs Help Click to display online help for the screen 188 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens See Also Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary m Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary m Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report m Partitions Reports Partition Details 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 189 Partition CAP Operation Screens Partition CAP Operation Screens Diagnostics gt CAP Assign CAP Button 190 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition CAP Operation Screens Diagnostics gt CAP Assign CAP Button Sample Screen Tools Help Diagnostics Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 cap CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 ImporbExport Assign CAP Button caP 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Partitions Assigned To This CAP Button o Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Select the partition to be assigned to the CAPButton then click Apply to make assignment Partitions with common cap configuration ie None Common only Partitions with split cap configuration 1 6 L All Split onty Description Allows you to select the partitions to which you want
130. I Small Computer System Interface Fibre Optics User s Guide xxiv SL500 User s Guide June 2010 3161201xx 3161202xx 3161204xx 3126422xx 3126425xx 3126423xx 3126426xx 3126424xx Part Number 3161956xx ANSI X3 TR 1 82 ANSI X3B5 87 009 ANSI X3 27 1978 ANSI X3T9 2 91 010R7 ISO 9316 1989 9433 Revision KB 96116 Documentation Support and Training Documentation Support and Training Function URL Documentation m Customer m http docs sun com m Employee m http docs sfbay sun com m Partner m https spe sun com spx control Login Downloads m Customer m http www sun com download index jsp m Employee m https dlrequest zn dlapps1 sfbay sun com usr login Support m http www sun com support Training m http www oracle com global us education sun_select_ country html Sun Online m https reg sun com register Account Oracle Welcomes Your Comments Oracle is interested in improving its documentation and welcomes your comments and suggestions Submit your comments by clicking the Feedback link at http docs sun com Please include the title and part number of your document with your feedback SL500 User s Guide part number 96116 96116 Revision KB Preface xxv Oracle Welcomes Your Comments xxvi SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 1 SL500 Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the major hardware
131. NING C Program Files SuniWebServer7VibWwsconfigurator dll Cant find dependent libraries Java java lang UnsatisfiedLinkError C Program Files SunWVvebServer WibWwsconfigurator dll Cant find dependent libraries Enterprise at java lang ClassLoader NativeLibrary load Native Method System at java lang ClassLoader loadLibraryO ClassLoaderjava 1 751 y atjava lang ClassLoader loadLibrary ClassLoader java 1676 at java lang Runtime loadLibrary0 Runtime java 822 at java lang System loadLibrary System java 993 at cor sun web admin configurator WinServices lt clinit gt WinServices java 93 at com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer configureServer ConfigureServer java 579 at com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer main ConfigureServerjava 62 Nov 4 2007 2 00 21 AM corn sun web installer web actions Postinstall_core configureServer ARNING Error while executing the backend configurator Nov 4 2007 2 00 21 AM corn sun web installer web actions PostInstall_core configureServer INFO The status returned from the backend is1 Nov 4 2007 2 00 22 AM com sun web installer web actions Postinstall_core install INFO End core server configuration Nov 4 2007 2 00 22 AM com sun web installer web actions Postinstall_core createlnfFile INFO Successfully created the install inf file Nov 4 2007 2 00 22 AM com sun web installer web actions Postinstall_core copyMsgJar INFO Successfully copied the messages jar file Nov 4 2007 2 00 22 AM com sun web i
132. SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Standalone SL Console Standalone SL Console Updates Note Before you can install a new version of the standalone SL Console you must uninstall the previous version See your PC or workstation documentation for detailed instructions Running multiple versions of the SL Console on the same PC or workstation can cause problems such as inconsistent data on reports Once you have uninstalled the previous version of the SL Console see the following procedures for detailed instructions on upgrading the software m Download the Standalone SL Console Installer on page 63 m Install the Standalone SL Console on page 64 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 39 SL Console Task Summary SL Console Task Summary SL Console tasks are divided into the following categories m General SL Console Usage Tasks on page 41 m General SL Console Report Tasks on page 55 m Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks on page 62 40 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks General SL Console Usage Tasks Task Page Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using a Browser or 42 Command Line Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using an Icon 47 Log in to the Standalone SL Console 5i Log Off the SL Console 53 Change a User Password 54 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Conso
133. StorageTek SL500 Modular Library System Users Guide Y R Sun Part Number 96116 June 2010 Revision KB Submit comments about this document by clicking the Feedback link at http docs sun com SL500 User s Guide Revision KB Part Number 96116 Copyright 2007 2010 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual propery laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this is software or related software documentation that is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are commercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the a
134. Sun Support locations 114183 October 2006 H Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 114158 July 2006 G Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 142254 April 2006 F Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 114112 December 2005 E Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 128083 May 2005 D Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 111956 January 2005 C Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 111939 October 2004 B Refer to this edition for a description of the changes 132072 September 2004 A Initial release xxii SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Preface This User s Guide is intended primarily for SL500 library system administrators and operators It can also be used by Oracle StorageTek partners and support representatives Most of the information pertains to the library hardware the StorageTek Library Console and related operations For specific drive information or for client application software commands see the appropriate drive or software documentation Related Documentation The following lists contain the names and order numbers of publications that provide additional information about the product The documentation is available online at http docs sun com SL500 Library Documentation Part Number SL500 System Assurance Guide MT9212 SL500 SNMP Reference Guide 3161946
135. The addressing scheme used by the SL500 is a four digit comma separated value specifying the library module row and column as viewed from inside the library facing the drive bays This addressing scheme is commonly referred to as the LMRC address The format of the SL500 LMRC address is 1 m r c where a l library or partition number In partitioned libraries l is the partition ID 1 8 In non partitioned libraries l is always 0 m module number 1 5 The Base Module is 1 additional drive expansion and storage expansion modules are 2 5 m r row number Numbered consecutively from the top down with row 1 at the top m c column number as follows a Base module left side of library 1 4 a Base module right side of library 5 8 a DEM Drive Expansion Module drive column rear of library 9 a CEM Cartridge Expansion Module columns rear of library 9 11 Internal Address Examples m If the entire Base Module is allocated to Partition 1 the internal address for a cartridge in row 8 column 1 in the Base Module is 1 1 8 1 m If the entire CEM is allocated to Partition 2 the internal address for a cartridge in row 10 column 1 is 2 2 10 1 Host SCSI Element Address The element address is used by hosts to uniquely identify each library resource available to the host SCSI element numbering uses a single integer to identify each library resource SCSI element numbering within partitioned libraries
136. This means they can be replaced without removing power from the library as longer as the following actions are done m Back up the server before removing the tape drive m If the tape drives are daisy chained stop all data processing on the channel to which the tape drives are connected before disconnecting the tape drives m Make sure that there is no activity on the SCSI bus before disconnecting the external SCSI cables Stop all processes on the host m Make sure that all signals are terminated at each end of the SCSI bus m If your external SCSI cables are long enough that they do not interfere with removing and replacing the tape drives you can swap tape drives without disconnecting the external SCSI cables If so disregard the steps to remove those cables Caution Possible data loss or system problem If you must disconnect the external SCSI cables make sure that you quiesce the system first stop all processes on the tape drives on the SCSI bus with the tape drive you are replacing All tape drives are mounted on SL500 unique tray assemblies Each assembly contains the m Tape drive m 5 VDC fan RLD tape drive interface card Drive tray assemblies are installed in slots also called bays accessible from the back of the library When a tape drive is inserted into the assigned slot it connects to the RLD card by way of a cable The RLD card connects directly to the RLM or RLE Drive Expansion Module backplane thro
137. To 0 000161L2 Unreachable from any host Disappeared v Ill Do you want to commit these changes a Yes No lt lt Details 5 Optionally in the expanded view of the warning messages you can do the following m Click Print to print the detailed message data m Click Save to save the detailed message data to a comma separated file 6 Proceed as follows m Click No to cancel the update The library controller database is not updated but all partition changes from this login session are retained in the SL Console partition workspace m Click Yes to update the library controller database The Commit Success popup appears Partition information successfully committed Click OK to return to the Commit Step 4 screen 7 All affected library host applications must now be configured to recognize these updates See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 118 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Management Tasks Partition Management Tasks Task Page Modify Partition Summary Information 120 Delete a Partition TA Modify Host Partition Connection Detail 123 Delete a Host Partition Connection 124 Refresh the SL Console Partition Workspace 126 Reallocate Library Resources 127 Make a Hardware Change to a Partitioned Library 128 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 119 Partition Management Tasks
138. To complete the installation see Install the Standalone SL Console on page 64 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 63 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks v Install the Standalone SL Console Use this procedure to install the standalone SL Console on your PC or workstation Note Your Oracle CSE may have performed this procedure for you during library installation Note Prior to using this procedure you must have downloaded the standalone SL Console installer program See Download the Standalone SL Console Installer on page 63 1 Double click the SL Console installer file icon on your PC or workstation to start the installation A digital signature warning popup appears Open File Security Warning x The publisher could not be verified Are you sure you want to run this software m Name SLConsole_Windows exe Publisher Unknown Publisher Type Application From D Documents and Settings IV Always ask before opening this file This file does not have a valid digital signature that verifies its publisher You should only run software from publishers you trust How can decide what software to run 2 Verify the name of the file and click Run The installation wizard begins and the Introduction screen appears 64 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks Note At any time during the ins
139. Vol Ser Explanation 1 6 8 From 0 To 2 PQ2301L2 Magically appeared to host 2 1 4 8 From 07To 1 ENO619L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 3 8 From 07To 1 EN1005L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 4 E From 2 To 0 000161L2 Unreachable from any host Disappeared w q i I gt Ok lt lt Details Description Displays a list of configuration errors in the current SL Console partition workspace This screen is a popup that appears when you click Verify Results on the Partitions Design Step 3 screen Possible errors include m A partition has orphaned cartridges See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries for details m Library resources have been removed from a partition m A host partition connection does not have a partition assigned to LUN 0 applies to FC SCSI connections only If any of these error conditions are present the screen initially displays summary warning messages You can view detailed messages by clicking the Details button It is recommended that you resolve all errors before committing the data to the library controller database Optionally you can print the screen data or save it to a comma separated file 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 165 Partition Design and Commit Screens Note The partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions All partition
140. a Disable Default Agent trap requests are sent received on LAN port a Enable SNMP traps are enabled and the agent responds to gets from the clients 5 Click Apply 334 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks v Transfer the Library MIB File Use this procedure to copy the public SNMP management information base MIB file to a specified location on your local PC or workstation The file is saved as a text file You can e mail the file to your Oracle support representative to help diagnose problems with the library 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears 3 Click the TransferFile tab The MIB file transfer screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 0 gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 0 o Power Supply Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0 o Safety Door Folder 1 0 0 0 0 96116 Revision KB Reboot Library Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest Search RewMove TransferFile Select file to be transferred by pressing the button next to the file description Transfer SNMP public MIB text file STREAMLINE TAPE LIBRARY MIB txt Transfer Transfer log snapshot file Transfer Chapter 13 SNMP Support 335 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks 4 Click Transfer The Save popup appears Save In tmp ca e
141. acle Online Account username and password 1 Open a Web browser and in the Location Bar or Address field enter the URL of the Oracle Web Servers page http www sun com download index jsp cat Web 20 26 20Proxy 20Servers amp tab 3 amp subcat Web 20Servers 390 2 On the Web Servers page click the Web Server link that corresponds to your server platform native NSAPI library form as well as the popular FastCGI form An installer is provided to ease installation and Web Server 7 0 Update 1 This is a full multilanguage product installation with performance and stability improvements out of box Java support for Servlets 2 5 JSP 2 1 JSF 1 2 and more support for Java SE 5 0 and 6 plus NetBeans IDE 5 0 5 5 and 5 5 1 and administration interface support for FastCcl erne a Add On 6 1 Service Pack 4 hi ftware i a This allows third party applications that do not support the Web Server s native API NSAPI or may have thread safety issues to be safely used without a significant SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 3 On the Sun Java System Web Server screen this will vary according to your selection in the previous step scroll down to verify the list of supported platforms and click Download AY Products Downloads Services amp Solutions Support Training Developer Sun Java System Web Server 7 0 Update 1 Sun Java TM System Web Server
142. ad The keypad is used to 10 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Controls and Indicators m Open the door m Open all CAPs m Notify you if service is required Under normal conditions at power on all keypad LEDs are solidly lit Once library applications begin 1 All keypad LEDs turn off 2 The Library Active LED flashes until the audit is complete then turns off 3 The Library Active LED turns on at the start of each command then turns off when each command is completed 4 The Library Active LED flashes when the library is active 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 11 Controls and Indicators FIGURE 1 3 Buttons and Indicators Service Robot Service Required L204_014 1 Door Open button 5 Service Required LED 2 Door Open LED 6 Library Active LED 3 CAP Open button 7 Service Robot LED 4 CAP Open LED TABLE 1 5 Keypad Buttons and Indicators Buttons Indicator Description Service Robot Indicator LED is lit when the robot is not functioning The service representative might need to check the log error file for the result code and perform the appropriate action Library Active Indicator LED is active when the library is active 12 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Controls and Indicators TABLE 1 5 Keypad Buttons and Indicators Continued Buttons Indicator Description Service Required See TABLE 1 6 for detail
143. ailable on the pull down menus m Min First element of that location type library module row or column in the library m Max Last element of that location type library module row or column in the library Caution If the library is partitioned make sure to keep the cartridge in the same partition it is currently allocated to Moving a cartridge to a cell allocated to a different partition could result in a host treating the cartridge as scratch and overwriting the data Moving the cartridge to an unallocated cell will result in the cartridge being inaccessible to all hosts 8 Click the Start button in the Options Bar Tools Help Diagnostics ger Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library CaP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RewMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 o Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 RECOVERY MOVE Choose source and destination location for move Then choose Start button above to initiate cartridge move This move function is intended to move a The robot moves the cartridge and then a success message popup appears SLConsole x Successfully moved cartridge from location 0 1 1 3 to 0 1 1 8 9 Click OK 248 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Management Tasks 10 To verify the new location you can display a Cartridge Summary Report See List Library Cartridges o
144. ain in use but only in a degraded mode 11 11 SNMP Agent Start Up Note You can also set combinations of trap levels For example 1 2 1 11 1 2 11 Port Control Typically SNMP uses user datagram protocol UDP ports m 61 for the agent m 62 for the manager UDP like TCP runs on top of IP networks and is one of the core protocols in the Internet protocol suite UDP allows network based devices to send short messages faster and more efficiently for many lightweight and time sensitive applications The basic protocol for communications between manager and agent is m The manager can send requests from any available port to the agent at port 161 The agent then responds to that source port to the requesting manager m The agent generates traps or notifications and sends them from any available port to the manager at port 162 Access Control SNMPV2c community strings are capable of providing a form of access control in SNMP Because of this the Oracle StorageTek embedded agent will not allow community strings to make changes to the library s configuration The MIB file can be retrieved with either SNMPv2c or SNMPv3 however because SNMPv3 provides encryption capabilities and a stronger user identification library properties can be changed only with the SNMPv3 set command Using an administrative password also provides access control and authorization for set command operations Traps however can
145. anagement 203 Library Management Tasks v Display Library Controller Properties View details of the library controller including the serial number and firmware versions Note This information is also available through Reports gt Library Information See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Click the Properties tab and then the Library Controller tab Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 Library ____ amp CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Properties Statistics Auto Clean SNMP o ive Folder 1 Drive Folder 0 0 0 General Library Controller Module SCSI Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Library Controller Model SL500 Serial Number RLC 74004693 EC Level 142103 Hardware Compat Level 0 Manufacture Date 12 19 2006 Part Number 313906413 Part Type RLC Product Family Code GRN Software Compat Level 1 Code Version Name wersion Firmware wersion i 395 6 64 00 Robot HW Version 4 Robot Version Read From scanner Scanner Version A41 PT411 204 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Management Tasks v Display Library Physical Configuration View the current physical configuration of the library 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Click the Properties tab and then the Mod
146. andling Tasks Cartridge Handling Tasks Task Page Apply a Label to a Cartridge 388 96116 Revision KB Appendix B Cartridge Information 387 Cartridge Handling Tasks v Apply a Label to a Cartridge Cartridge labels reflect the cartridge media and usage If your cartridges were not ordered with labels already applied you must apply them yourself You must correctly label all cartridges for library use Caution Possible misread of volume number label Make sure the edges of the labels do not curl curling causes the cartridges to stick in the tape drive loader and the robot to misread the label Use the procedure to apply a label to a tape cartridge 1 Make sure the cartridge has been at room temperature for at least 24 hours 2 Clean the surface where the labels will be placed using a cleaning solution made for this purpose see Maintaining Cartridges on page 376 3 Locate the type of label that you require 4 Hold the cartridge so that the write protect switch is toward you 5 Attach the label to the cartridge See the following figures for details m LTO cartridges FIGURE B 3 on page 381 m SDLT DLT S4 cartridges FIGURE B 6 on page 384 388 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 APPENDIX C Web launched SL Console Server The Web launched SL Console is a standard feature of the SL500 and is included on a CD shipped with each library It enables the SL Console to be insta
147. ansion Module Installed Below CEM Installed Below CEM L204_556 COLUMNS Yoon ao op eet a0 pa sVoon oo aVuon 364 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Mixed Media Configurations Mixed Media Configurations The following figures show mixed media storage cell and tape drive locations m FIGURE A 5 Base Module Mixed Media Cells on page 366 shows a library with only a Base Module m FIGURE A 6 Mixed Media Firmware Cell Mapping on page 367 shows a library with a Base Module that has eight reserved cells one Drive Expansion Module and one Cartridge Expansion Module m FIGURE A 7 Mixed Media SCSI Element Numbering Mapping on page 368 shows a library with a Base Module that has two reserved cells one Drive Expansion Module and one Cartridge Expansion Module The storage cell numbering begins with the first cell after the reserved cells in column 1 The figure shows two reserved cells but there could be more If the reserved cells are configured as storage cells the top cell row 1 would be 1 m FIGURE A 8 Mixed Media Cells for Back Wall of Cartridge Expansion Module on page 369 shows the cell capacity of a Cartridge Expansion Module according to which type of module is installed above and below it 96116 Revision KB Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 365 Mixed Media Configurations FIGURE A 5 Base Module Mixed Media Cells ee COLUMNS
148. appears SLConsole Sequence xi Enter TARGET address range All slots within this range will be accessed according to the Access Order specified in the last dialog box Selection Mode All Storage Slots Drive Drive amp Storage Slots Cap Minimum Address Maximum Address Row Row Cancel 5 Complete the TARGET screen as follows See Target Address Range on page 277 for details m In the Selection Mode field click the type of cells you want to diagnose m In the Minimum Address and Maximum Address fields select the library internal address of the starting and ending locations of the cells you want to diagnose 6 Click Next The SOURCE screen appears SLConsole Sequence xi Enter SOURCE address range Locations within this range will be used to supply cartridges and or empty slots required for diagnostic moves to from the Target Address Range There is no specified access order within the Source Address Range Selection Mode All Storage Slots Cap Minimum Address Maximum Address cm em lt Previous Next gt Cancel 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 315 Robot Utility Tasks 7 Complete the SOURCE screen as follows See Pool Address Range on page 278 for details m In the Selection Mode field click the appropriate cartridge pool address type m In the Minimum Address and Maximum Addre
149. arch for and click Search 58 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Report Tasks Note The search is case sensitive and wildcards are not supported SLConsole Search Text x Search Text default Search Cancel Clear Results 6 The Search Results popup appears displaying the number of occurrences of the text string All instances of the text string in the report are highlighted Tools Help Reports Ci Log C EventLog Error E Status Detail CAP Details D Drive Details Library Details L Robot Details J Status Summary C CAP Summary C Cartridge Summary C Drive Summary Library Information C Robot Summary C4 version Hardware Versions C Software Versions 7 Click OK to dismiss the popup 96116 Revision KB D EventLog Error Varn Cy EventLog Error Warn Inf if final false gt lt command audits command lt result identifier 1 gt lt resultStatus lt resultSeverity info lt resultSeverity gt lt resultC ode 0000 lt resultCode gt lt resultText lt CDATA End of Text gt lt resultText gt lt operationalState gt 000 lt operationalState gt lt resultSt atus gt lt cartPresent false lt cartPresent lt upsideDown falses upsideDown lt address 1 1 7 1 45 lt addr ess gt slabel gt lt I CDATA gt lt label lt result gt lt response Seo ste Se _ EL
150. are met m The required number of reserved cells are empty m The CAP Prevent Allow state is set to Allow see your SCSI Reference Manual for syntax m The CAP does not contain any data cartridges 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Expand the CAP Folder highlight the CAP and then select the Import Export tab Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 9 cap Folder 1 0 0 0 CAPo10a gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Start 1 CAP ImportExport Assign CAP Button Operation Import cleaning diagnostic cartridges Export all cleaning diagnostic cartridges O Export expired cleaning cartridges Import Export Console 3 Select Import Cleaning Diagnostic cartridges and then select the Start button from the Options Bar 4 The library controller opens the CAP door and the CAP Open LED is turned on 5 Grip the handle of the magazine and slide it out of the CAP and onto the door Note To help slide the magazine back into the CAP do not remove the magazine from the door Instead leave the magazine on the CAP door rails 6 Place the cartridges into the empty magazine cells making sure that the VOLID label is visible and the hub of the cartridge is down 256 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Cleaning Tasks Caution Possible damage to components You must enter the car
151. artitions Refresh ey Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step4 Reports 2 In the pull down menu select any report The specified report is displayed All report screens include the Print and Save to File buttons Print Save To File 3 Click Save to File The Save popup appears Save In tmp v IEE Pale C nnn html OrphanedCartridges csv B PartitionDetailsReport csv GB templates_report jar File Name cellsummaryReport Files of Type Comma Separated Values v Save Cancel 4 Browse to the directory where you want to save the file and enter the file name 5 Click Save The data is saved to the specified file 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 133 CAP Operation Tasks CAP Operation Tasks Task Enter Cartridges Into a Partitioned Library Eject Cartridges From a Partitioned Library 134 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Page 135 138 Revision KB 96116 CAP Operation Tasks v Enter Cartridges Into a Partitioned Library Use this procedure to enter cartridges into a partitioned library Partitions with no allocated CAP cells must use common CAP cells Partitions with allocated CAP cells must use the cells allocated to them Note This procedure highlights aspects of CAP operations that are unique to partitioned libraries For general enter and eject procedures see CAP
152. ata Later you can send the file to your Oracle support representative for analysis Note To monitor multiple events see Display Multiple Monitors on page 288 1 Select Tools gt Monitors 2 Expand the Permanent Monitors folder The library monitors you have access to are displayed Tools Help Monitors Window en Monitors Display 9 CA Permanent Monitors Dy all D Error Warn Info D Errors And Warnings D Errors 284 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Event Monitor Tasks 3 Click the event monitor you want to use and then click Open from the Options Bar The system displays the associated data collected for the event Tools Help Monitors Window Open Monitors Display Ci Permanent Monitors C jal Events F Al Events 3 D Error Events Monitor Spool File Bi Information Events Events D Warning Events Time Device ID User I F Activity 2008 05 29T11 19 22 261 0 1 0 0 root default internal 2008 05 29T11 19 22 531 0 1 0 0 root default internal 2008 05 29T11 19 47 108 0 1 0 0 root default internal a 4 Use these options to manage the information displayed on the screen for the event selected Select To Monitor gt Pause Pause the continuous display of data related to the event selected Monitor gt Resume Resume displaying the events Monitor gt Stop Permanently stop the continuous display
153. ate Code A Entire Library Physical Audit Verified Audit Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 f pf xs Ves No Yes No Yes No Start Address End Address O Type Cap v Type Module min gt Module Row m e mm ap v Audit Console 4 In the Entire Library field click No In the Physical Audit field click Yes In the Verified Audit field click No 5 In the Start Address and End Address fields select the device types you want to audit and the starting and ending library internal address locations 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 305 Audit Tasks 6 Click the Audit button in the Options Bar A confirmation popup appears SLConsole LJ Physical audits can take several minutes depending on the size of the audit area Do you want to continue x 7 Click OK to perform the audit as a background process or Cancel to cancel the audit Note Once you click OK you cannot stop the audit it will run until completion 8 The Audit Console section displays the progress of the audit Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 Library Audit Reboot gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RewMove TransferFile Entire Library Physical Audit Verified Audit Yes No
154. ation includes m Current drive and drive tray status information m Whether the drive is loaded m Drive cleaning information Note This information is also available through Reports gt Drive Details See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the Drive Folder and click the drive you want to display 3 Click Status The screen displays the current status of the selected drive Tools Help System Detail Library 1 0 0 0 gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Drivero 1 1 9 Drive 0 1 2 9 Drive 0 3 1 9 Drive 0 3 2 9 Drive 0 3 4 9 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 oe Drive Status Properties Statistics State Status Drive State Drive needs cleaning Drive Enclosure L MR C Address Fan Working ___Fan Status Temp degC Temp State 0 1 1 9 True Operative Ok 27 220 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks v Display Drive Properties View detailed drive configuration information including the drive type and serial number and port configuration Note This information is also available through Reports gt Drive Details See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the Drive Folder and click the drive you want to disp
155. ation Optionally access other screens to perform the following tasks a Add Partition a Modify Partition a Delete Partition a Add Connection a Modify Connection a Delete Connection 3 Design Step 3 Display and optionally modify detailed partition boundary information Optionally access other screens to perform the following tasks a Verify Partition Configurations a Refresh the display with current data from the library controller database 4 Commit Step 4 Commit all changes made in the Summary 2 and Design 3 screens and all associated popups to the library controller database Optionally access other screens to perform the following task a Refresh the display with current data from the library controller database You can use the Reports screen at any time to display and optionally save or print partition configuration information from the library controller database SL Console Partition Workspace The partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions All partition configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session This allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes 104 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96
156. ation This can be a maximum of 31 alphanumeric characters SNMP user ID Authentication protocol type MD5 or SHA string for users and hosts receiving traps One of the two primary SNMPv3 security protocols designed to reliably identify the integrity of the originating party Authentication password of the user Privacy protocol type DES or AES The other two primary SNMPv3 security protocols are designed to protect information within the message from disclosure Encryption Password that is the private key for encryption The indexed SNMP users list is displayed at the bottom of the screen There can be a maximum of 20 users 330 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks v Delete SNMP Users Use this procedure to delete a SNMP user 1 Select Tools gt System Detail Select the Library folder from the device tree Select SNMP gt Delete Users Enter the Index number of the SNMP user from the list a A ww N Click Apply Verify the SNMP users list and make sure that the user is deleted 96116 Revision KB Chapter 13 SNMP Support 331 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks v Add Trap Recipients A recipient is a location on a manager where the SNMP agent sends traps This location is defined by the combination of either the IP address or DNS name and the port number Use this procedure to add a trap recipient Select Tools gt System Detail
157. be accessed at all For example you can leave an area of cells unallocated in preparation for a planned future partition On the SL Console screens and reports storage cells and drives appear in any of the following states m Allocated Assigned to the current partition m Unallocated or Unassigned Not assigned to any partition available to be assigned to any current partition m Unavailable Assigned to another partition m Not accessible Not available for host operations for example cells reserved for diagnostic cartridges cells that are physically blocked Note Robots are shared resources and cannot be allocated exclusively to a partition To display partition assignments for storage cells and drives see Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary on page 176 Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries Note For a discussion of orphaned cartridges in non partitioned libraries see Orphaned Cartridges in Non Partitioned Libraries on page 110 In partitioned libraries an orphaned cartridge is a cartridge located in an unallocated cell or drive that is a cell or drive not allocated to any defined partition Caution If a host encounters an orphaned cartridge it might treat the cartridge as scratch and overwrite the data Therefore it is very important to disposition orphaned cartridges properly A cartridge can become orphaned for a variety of reasons Followi
158. be sent to recipients using either SNMPv2c or SNMPv3 by adding entries to the Trap Recipient List 328 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks Task Page Add SNMP Users 330 Delete SNMP Users 331 Add Trap Recipients 332 Delete Trap Recipients 333 Set Up Port Control 334 Transfer the Library MIB File Boo 96116 Revision KB Chapter 13 SNMP Support 329 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks v Add SNMP Users Use this procedure to add an SNMP user 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Select the Library folder from the device tree 3 Select SNMP gt Add Users and enter the following details Version Community v2c only UserName v3 only Auth v3 only AuthPass v3 only Priv v3 only PrivPass v3 only 4 Click Apply Version of the SNMP standard The SL500 library supports a SNMPv2c of the simple network management protocol for machine status queries With this version any information transmitted is not secure a SNMPv3 of the simple network management protocol is reserved for proprietary information Because this version supports encryption and stronger user identification it is the preferred protocol for proprietary data Applications use community strings for access control The manager includes the community string in its SNMP messages to an agent The agent consequently can accept or reject the oper
159. brary 1 0 0 0 Library amp CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RewMove TransferFile Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 o v Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 RECOVERY MOVE Choose source and destination location for move Then choose Start button above to initiate cartridge move This move function is intended to move a The robot moves the cartridge A success message popup appears when the operation is complete xi Successfully moved cartridge DG 0085S to location 0 1 1 8 8 Click OK 244 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Management Tasks 9 To verify the new location you can display a Cartridge Summary Report See List Library Cartridges on page 240 for details For example Tools Help Reports Search Update Save Log Statistics Status Detail Display Cartridge Summary Status Summary Generated on Fri Jun 27 15 10 09 MDT 2008 D CAP Summary C Cartridge Summary D Drive Summary Library Information Location 0 1 4 1 D Robot Summary Location Type cell Version Media Type LtoGen2_200GB Type data Cartridge ENGOO8L2 Location 0 1 3 8 Location Type cap Media Type LtoGen1_100GB Type data Cartridge 000051L1 Location 0 1 1 8 Location Type cap Media Type SDLT 1 Type data Cartridge DG 0085 Location 0 1 1 1 Location Type playground 10 To update the new cartridge l
160. cartridges in the current partition configuration Includes module row and columnlocation of the cartridge cartridge volume serial number VOLID and probable causes and explanations why the cartridge is orphaned Buttons Print Click to print the report on a selected printer 166 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Save Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs OK Click to cancel the update The library controller database is not updated but all partition changes from this login session are retained in the SL Console partition workspace Details Click to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the warning message display See Also m Partitions Design Step 3 m Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 167 Partition Design and Commit Screens Partitions Commit Step 4 Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Apply Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports To commit your Partition and Host Connection definitions please follow the series of steps below 1 Before committing any changes please review your settings As appropriate you should review the Partition and Host Conne
161. ces ney Document Directories f y Edt Java Settings kij CGI Directories j yy L Request Server Certificate MERI lal URL Redirects nes L Install Server Certificate MESM al View Summary id View Summary p ET i New Configuration EN New Virtual Server iy Migrate mes View Logs yes Documentation E view Online Documentation 400 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management v Install and Deploy the Web launched SL Console Note Before you perform this activity you must obtain the Web launched SL Console installation CD 1 On the server insert the Web launched SL Console installation CD in the CD drive 2 Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console See Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console on page 398 for details 3 On the Common Tasks screen click Add Web Application LOG OUT User admin Server C129684 Sun Java System Web Server d Common Tasks i i Monitoring Common Tasks To access information about a task select the i info button To understand the terminology click here Configuration Tasks Virtual Server Tasks Select Cont C129684 louisville stortek com ziakis Select Vi ver C129684 louisville stortek com lt li Edit Configuration kij Edit Virtual Server ES New Instance ES __ Start Stop Instances kij __ Document Directories i L Edit
162. ch screen appears Welcome to STORAGETEK Library Console SS amp Sun 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 47 General SL Console Usage Tasks 2 Click Launch Now The Web Start process retrieves the Web launched SL Console application from the server Any updates are downloaded automatically If this is the first time you are running the Web launched SL Console a security warning popup appears Warning Security Xx The application s digital signature has been verified Do G gt you want to run the application bas Java Name StorageTek Library Console Publisher Streamline Library Console From http f aitor stortek com 8181 Cancel More Information Li The digital signature has been validated by a trusted source 3 Complete the popup as follows a Verify that the Publisher is Oracle Corporation b Optionally click the Always trust content from the publisher checkbox If you make this selection this popup will not appear during future logins 48 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks c Click Run If this is the first time you are running the Web launched SL Console the License Agreement popup appears License Agreement Installation and Use of StorageTek Library Console Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT Streamline Library Console software
163. ck None m In the Split CAP table clear all the checkboxes 140 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Screen Reference Partition Screen Reference This section includes detailed descriptions of all SL Console partition screens arranged by screen navigation path For example Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Connection indicates the screen accessed by clicking Tools and then Partitions from the Menu Bar and then clicking the Summary Step 2 tab and then the Add Connection button Partition Screens are organized into the following categories m Partition Summary Screens on page 142 a Partition Design and Commit Screens on page 159 m Partition Report Screens on page 173 m Partition CAP Operation Screens on page 190 Note The partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions All partition configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session This allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session en
164. com 3 Download the hardware activation file to a system accessible to the SL Console session Use the standard method for saving e mail attachments 72 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation File Tasks v Install a New Hardware Activation File on the Target Library Use this procedure to install a new hardware activation file on the target library Prior to performing this procedure you must download a new hardware activation file to a system accessible to the SL Console session See Receive a New Hardware Activation File on page 72 1 Use the SL Console to log in to the target library See General SL Console Usage Tasks on page 41 for details 2 Select Tools gt Hardware Activation and click the Install Hardware Activation Keys tab The Install Hardware Activation Keys screen appears Tools Help Hardware Activation Reboot Install Current Hardware Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Type a file name and press the Enter key or use the Browse button FileName Browse 3 In the File Name field enter the full path of the hardware activation file you want to install and press Enter Optionally you can click Browse and navigate to the file location The Hardware Activation File details appear in the lower part of the screen Tools Help Hardware Activation Reboot Install Current Hardwa
165. configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session This allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Note The screen fields are the same as those displayed in the Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply popup Warnings found Display only Summary error messages regarding the partition configuration The following hosts will need re audited Display only World Wide Port Names WWPNs of any hosts that should re audit their library partition This may be because library resources have been deleted from the partition The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set Display only World Wide Port Names WWPNs of any hosts that have not defined any library partitions as LUN 0 on the host The following orphaned cartridges were found Display only Detailed information regarding all orphaned
166. ct Switch 386 xvi SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Tables TABLE 1 1 TABLE 1 2 TABLE 1 3 TABLE 1 4 TABLE 1 5 TABLE 1 6 TABLE 1 7 TABLE 1 8 TABLE 1 9 TABLE 5 1 TABLE 12 1 TABLE A 1 TABLE A 2 TABLE A 3 TABLE A 4 TABLE A 5 TABLE A 6 TABLE B 1 TABLE 0 1 LTO Storage Cell and Tape Drive Capacities 5 Mixed Media Storage Cell and Tape Drive Capacities 9 Power Supply LED 10 Drive Tray LED 10 Keypad Buttons and Indicators 12 Keypad Service Required LED 13 RLC Card Indicators 14 LTO Media Tape Drive Compatibility 16 SDLT DLT S4 Media Tape Drive Compatibility 17 Partition Example Resource Description 97 Troubleshooting Table 280 Cell Figure Legend 359 Library Component Weights 373 Library Environment Specifications 373 Power for Library Without Tape Drives 374 Power for Base Unit and Two LTO Tape Drives 374 Power for Drive Expansion Module and Four LTO Tape Drives 374 LTO Cartridge Codes 379 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridge Codes 385 96116 Revision KB xvii xviii SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 5ummary of Changes EC Date Revision Description June 2010 KB Described new reports See the following m Display the Library Utilization Reports on page 91 Display Current Drive Mappings on page 117 Display Drive Mapping History on page 119 Display the Drive Distribution Reports on page 123 m Dis
167. ct by Cell v Base Module1 LTO 3 In the Partition pull down menu select the partition you want to verify All screen fields are updated to reflect the current configuration for the selected partition In the Options Bar click Verify The boundaries of the selected partition are verified including the locations of all tape cartridges Note This verification is performed on the current partition configuration in the SL Console partition workspace only It does not verify current partition boundaries against the library controller database therefore it cannot identify configuration conflicts that may arise due to other users performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes through the command line interface other SL Console sessions or host applications at the same time you have made partition changes The Verify Results popup appears indicating whether there are any orphaned cartridges or other errors in the current partition configuration xl Warnings Found Some WwWPNs will need re audit Some hosts do not employ LUN 0 Cartridge data may be lost Ok Details gt gt 114 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Configuration Tasks 5 To display detailed warning messages explaining the reasons for any orphaned cartridges click Details You can use the Details button to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the war
168. ct the time period for which you want to display summary activity Options are m Last 24 Hours The previous 24 hours m Last 7 Days The previous 7 days m Last Month The previous 31 days 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 229 Drive Management Tasks m Last Year The previous 52 weeks The selected report is displayed Tools Help Reports gt E3 Statistics gt EJ Log gt cJ Status Summary gt cJ Status Detail gt c version 4 Drive Distribution C Last 24 Hours G Last 7 Days Bi Last Month C Last Year gt cJ Drive Utilization gt c Library Utilization Search Update Save Drive Distribution Last 24 Hours wv Drive Address Slot Mounts Percent Utilization Percent Total Mounts 0 1 1 9 1 1 95 3 0 1 0 1 2 9 2 750 32 4 50 0 0 2 1 9 3 749 30 6 49 9 Total lo 1500 0 0 0 0 gt T gt Screen Fields Drive Address Display only Library internal address of the drive Format is l m r c where a l for non partitioned libraries this is the library ID always 0 for partitioned libraries this is the partition ID 1 8 m module number 1 5 from top to bottom of the rack a r drive row number 1 2 Base Module or 1 4 Drive Expansion Module from top to bottom of the module c column number always 9 for drives Slot Display only Drive slot number Slots are numbered 1
169. ction summary information on the Summary Step 2 tab as well as the specific partition layouts via the Design Step 3 screen 2 On the Design Step 3 screen we also highly recommend that you press the Verify button for each and every partition available via the Design screen to ensure that you have not orphaned or picked up any new media than what was planned 3 If all updates are as desired press the Apply on this screen Description Allows you to commit all data from the current SL Console partition workspace to the library controller database The following data will be committed for all partitions m Partition summary information Host partition connection configuration information m Partition boundary details Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups 168 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Caution It is recommended that you follow the Resolve Orphaned Cartridges procedure before using this screen Caution This screen updates the library controller database with
170. d them to the new partition Select Tools gt Partitions Click the Design Step 3 tab The Design Step 3 screen appears displaying the current configuration of the library Tools Help Partitions Verify Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 _ Reports Allocated Drives Allocated CAP Cells Unallocated Drives Totals For Partition 1 Allocated Storage Cells 27 Available Totals Unallocated Storage Cells 19 Unallocated CAP Cells 1 Legend lt Not Accessible L unallocated E Partition 1 HE other Partitions Cartridge Partition Left Side Wall Rear Side Wall Right Side Wall Select by cen Base Module1 LTO Add Remove a o gt a _ HP Drive Module2 LTO Partition 6 Module 2 row 2 col g Cartridge Emp In the Partition pull down menu select the partition you want to configure All screen fields are updated to reflect the current configuration for the selected partition Choose the Select by method and click either the Add or Remove radio button Use the library map to select the resources you want to add or remove 112 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Configuration Tasks Note See Partitions Design Step 3 on page 160 for detailed instructions on using the library map Your partition conf
171. dges 256 manual 252 262 status of 261 tasks 253 263 Drive Distribution Reports 229 Drive Expansion Module location 3 LTO capacities 5 mixed media capacities 9 Drive Mapping History Report 225 drive ports enabling and disabling 222 drive slots HLI PRC address 217 Drive Utilization Reports 232 drives addressing 217 cleaning See drive cleaning inserting cartridges into 352 location 3 LTO 16 management tasks 218 234 maximum 217 media compatibility 16 17 power specifications 374 properties 221 rebooting 311 removing cartridges from 353 SDLT DLT S4 16 SDLT DLT S4 cartridges 17 self test 310 states 217 status 220 summary information 219 utility tasks 309 312 weight specifications 373 Revision KB 96116 dWWN 217 dynamic World Wide Naming See dWWN E EJECT OK indicator 14 emergency power off See emergency robotics stop environment specifications 373 event monitors described 271 displaying 284 displaying multiple 288 spooling data to a file 286 tasks 283 288 F FAULT indicator 14 FC SCSI address drive 217 Fibre Channel port address setting 202 front door closing with power 346 closing without power 347 opening with power 343 opening without power 344 H hardware activation file activated capacity and 88 deleting 76 78 98 described 69 file type 69 installing 70 73 74 83 85 library serial number and 69 74 84 receiving 72 hardware activation screen reference 79 85 hardware activation tasks 70 7
172. drive Close the library access door FIGURE 14 2 Insert Cartridge into Drive L204 _018 1 SDLT DLT S4 Drive 2 SDLT DLT S4 Cartridge 3 LTO Cartridge 4 LTO Drive 352 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Handling Tasks v Remove a Cartridge from a Tape Drive To manually remove a cartridge from a tape drive 1 Obtain the tape drive number from the server console 2 Open the door and locate the appropriate tape drive Caution Possible data loss Failure to perform the next step could result in data loss 3 Press the Unload button on the tape drive and wait approximately 12 seconds until the operation completes FIGURE 14 3 Remove a Cartridge from an LTO Tape Drive I uur Lig 2 IBM HP L204_007 FIGURE 14 4 Remove a Cartridge from an SDLT Tape Drive SDLT L204 573 1 SDLT Unload Button 4 Gently pull the cartridge from the tape drive 5 Store the cartridge in an empty storage cell or outside the library 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 353 Cartridge Handling Tasks Note If you store the cartridge in an empty storage cell you must reinitialize the library and update the tape management s database see Return the Library to Ready Status on page 342 6 Close the library door 354 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Handling Tasks v Remove a Cartridge from the Gripper Asse
173. ds or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 141 Partition Summary Screens Partition Summary Screens Partitions lInstructions Step 1 Partitions Summary Step 2 Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Connection Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Connection Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Connection Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Partition Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Partition Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Partition 142 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Instructions Step 1 Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Instructions Step 1 Summary Step2 Design Step3 Commit Step4 Reports Instructions for Adding Modifying or Deleting Partitions and their Host Connections To create modify or delete partitions first go to the Summary tab Step 2 This tab will allow you to view all current partitions on the library as well as their current connections This tab has buttons to add delete or modify the partitions Ifthe Add button is selected a dialog box will allow you to name the partition and select a barcode option and then you can select the Design tab
174. dware Activation Reboot Delete Refresh Current Hardware Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary Feature Sequence Number Enabled Partitioning MultiPortFibre Capacity Capacity Capacity Capacity FulIDEM Canacite ENEA Associated Module Capacity Activation Detail Module Number Capacity Sequence Number Full Capacity Full Capacity Full Capacity Full Capacity Full Capacity 99001 99002 On do ha Cells Activated 349 Cells Not Activated 1 Total Numbers of Cells 350 3 Click the activation file you want to delete Note Sequence numbers 99000 and above are permanently retained and cannot be deleted from the library The Delete button in the Options Bar is activated Tools Help Hardware Activation Reboot Delete Refresh Current Hardware Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary sequence number 104 is currently selected Feature Sequence Number Enabled LimitedBase FullBase FullDEM 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 77 Hardware Activation File Tasks 4 Click the Delete button A Delete Confirmation popup appears as in the following example Delete Lontirmation x Are you sure you want to
175. e Load Code Activate Code gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Library TransferFile Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Mode Diagnostic Console 4 Click Run to start the test 290 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks The test begins and the Diagnostic Console section of the screen displays the status of the various diagnostic tests as they are performed Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library wii gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Non Disruptive Diagnostic Console Diagnostic started Diagnostic started Message Reserved cell check Message Diag Tape Check Message Register for Diagnostic Events Message Diagnostic Invoked using Cartridge 0 1 1 1 VolID DG 009L1 Message DIAGNOSTIC STARTED Message Basic Health Message Cell to Cell 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 291 Library Utility Tasks 5 When the test completes the results of the test are displayed in the Diagnostic Console Tools Help Diagnostics Run Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Mode Diagnostic Console Diagnostic started
176. e information dynamically unless you explicitly select the Update button on the Options Bar If you want to search the report data or save it to a file see the following procedures m Search a Library Report on page 58 m Save Library Report Data to a File on page 60 Additional reports are available from the following menus a Tools gt Partitions 1 Select Tools gt Reports The reports Display screen appears All library report options are listed in the navigation bar Tools Help Reports E gt J Statistics Display gt cI Log gt c Status Summary gt CJ Status Detail gt c version CJ Drive Distribution CJ Drive Interval Utilization 2 In the navigation bar expand a report category to see the report options 56 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Report Tasks 3 Click the report you want to display The selected report is displayed Tools Help Reports Search Update sae Statistics gt cI Log gt cJ Status Summary cf Status Detail CAP Details Generated on Fri Oct 30 11 10 02 MDT 2009 Drive Details Library Details LC Robot Details gt cf Version Device Id 4 Drive Distribution 2 PERE N EJ Drive Interval Utilization Size 12 Device CAP Status Device CAP Properties Device Id CAP Status Locked False CAP State Closed Status ok
177. e 53 Change a User Password 54 General SL Console Report Tasks 55 Display a Library Report 56 Search a Library Report 58 Save Library Report Data to a File 60 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks 62 Download the Standalone SL Console Installer 63 Install the Standalone SL Console 64 3 Hardware Activation Files 69 Hardware Activation File 69 Hardware Activation File Tasks 70 Hardware Activation File Installation Process 70 Hardware Activation File Task Summary 71 Receive a New Hardware Activation File 72 Install a New Hardware Activation File on the Target Library 73 Display Current Hardware Activation Files 75 96116 Revision KB Contents v Delete a Hardware Activation File 76 Hardware Activation Screen Reference 79 Hardware Activation gt Current Hardware Activation Keys 80 Hardware Activation gt Install Hardware Activation Keys 83 4 Capacity on Demand 87 Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions 87 Terminology 88 Planning Library Capacity 88 LTO Activated Capacity by Module 89 Mixed Media Activated Capacity by Module 89 Cell Assignment Rules 90 Orphaned Cartridges in Non Partitioned Libraries 90 Implementing Changes to Activated Capacity 91 Increasing Activated Capacity 91 Decreasing Activated Capacity 91 Host Notification of Capacity Changes 92 5 Library Partitioning 93 Partitioning Features and Restrictions 93 System Requirements for Library Partitioning 94 Enabling and Disabling Partitioning 94 Partition
178. e Management Tasks Task Page Enter Cartridges Through the CAP 237 Eject Cartridges Through the CAP 239 List Library Cartridges 240 Move a Specified Cartridge by VOLID 242 Move a Cartridge From a Specified Location 246 236 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Management Tasks v Enter Cartridges Through the CAP The Base Module CAP contains a standard four or five cell magazine See FIGURE 9 1 The expansion module CAP has two magazines Use this procedure to enter a cartridge into the library through a CAP Note Before using this procedure verify that the library CAP Prevent Allow state is set to Allow See your SCSI reference manual for syntax 1 Press the CAP Open button on the keypad The robot opens the CAP door and the CAP Open LED is turned on 2 Grip the handle of the magazine and slide it out of the CAP and onto the door Note Do not remove the magazine from the door Leaving the magazine on the door rails will allow the magazine to slide easier into the CAP 3 Place the cartridge into one of the magazine cells making sure that the cartridge label is visible and the hub of the cartridge is down 4 Grip the handle and slide the magazine back into the CAP m EA TH S INI y a EAN A iii 5 Close the CAP door making sure that the door is securely latched 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management 237 Cartridge Management Tasks
179. e area that is needed for resident tape cartridges and anticipate the number of required free cells You must understand the boundaries of each partition and the host ownership relationships You must verify that all tape drives and cartridges have been moved to the proper locations according to the plannedhost storage cell and host tape drive assignments 94 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Planning Installing the Partitioning Feature The following special considerations apply after you successfully install the Partitioning feature on a previously non partitioned library m You must reboot the library after installing the Partitioning activation file m Until you create at least one partition the library remains in a non partitioned state that is all activated storage cells drives and CAPs are accessible to all hosts Allocated Storage Capacity In partitioned libraries the total number of storage cells allocated to all library partitions cannot exceed the activated capacity of the library In partitioned libraries there is no default active storage region You must explicitly assign storage cells to partitions thereby configuring the active storage regions for each partition See Partitioning Process on page 104 for details Partition Configurations To configure a partition you must define the following information m Partition Summary Information m Host Partition Connections m Pa
180. e diagnostic tests Cartridge stuck in tape drive See Remove a Cartridge from a Tape Drive on page 353 Tape drive is unable to eject a cartridge See Remove a Cartridge from a Tape Drive on page 353 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 281 Diagnostic and Utility Tasks Diagnostic and Utility Tasks Library diagnostic and utility tasks are divided into the following categories m Event Monitor Tasks on page 283 Library Utility Tasks on page 289 Audit Tasks on page 302 Drive Utility Tasks on page 309 Robot Utility Tasks on page 313 282 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Event Monitor Tasks Event Monitor Tasks Task Page Display an Event Monitor 284 Spool Event Monitor Data to a File 286 Display Multiple Monitors 288 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 283 Event Monitor Tasks v Display an Event Monitor Event monitor information is dynamically updated depending upon occurrence of the selected events The information sent during an e mail print save or spool operation reflects the data and format shown on screen at the time the operation is requested Note Event monitors are useful tools for root cause analysis of errors If the library is experiencing reproducible errors you can open an event monitor and spool all events to a file to capture the d
181. e partition 1 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 121 Partition Management Tasks 5 The updates are made as follows Your partition configuration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace for the duration of this login session To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login session see Verify Partition Configurations on page 114 and Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 If there are no partitions remaining in the library when you commit the updates the library state will change to non partitioned 122 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Management Tasks v Modify Host Partition Connection Detail Use this procedure to modify the host World Wide Port Name or LUN number of the library for a host partition connection Note You cannot modify the target port number for the library it is always 0 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Summary Step 2 tab Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition Summary Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated Bago alle ERE Storage Cells Drives CAP Cells Drives 8 71 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125
182. e retracts the robot into the robotic unit to prevent the robot from being damaged and to prepare it for servicing 2 When the Open Door indicator turns on use the key to open the door 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 343 General Library Operation Tasks v Open the Front Door Without Power To open the front door when no library power exists Note You must manually move the robotics park lever beneath the facade and to the bottom left of the keypad to the left position so that you can open the door with the key Under normal conditions the lever signifies that the robot is parked inside the robotics unit at the top of the library and the door can be safely opened When no power exists the robot is not actually parked but you will be able to open the door when you move the lever to the left In the following picture the lever is not in the parked position L204 568 1 Press the power switch on the back of the library to the OFF position 2 Remove the robotic facade from the top of the library by gently pulling the facade from side to side to pull the ball studs away from the clips You might have to use a screwdriver to gently pry it off L204 569 344 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General Library Operation Tasks Warning Possible Physical Injury Possible injury to finger Make sure that your finger is completely to the left in the next step
183. ealth indicators for each of the following devices m Library a CAPs m Drives m Robots Tools Help System Detail appw Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 0 Drive CaP Folder 1 0 0 0 0 Status Properties Display caP 1 1 2 2 0 cap 11 520 Sled A Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 0 Transition Request select transition v Drive 1 1 1 1 2 Health State warn Drive 1 1 3 1 2 Device State Not Ready A Drive 11 412 Access State offline ote eee 4 Drive State empty Driestar Drive needs cleaning false Drive 1 1 4 1 1 Drive Last Cleaned Unknown 9 7 Power Supply Folder 1 0 0 0 Host Activity false V Power Supply 1 0 0 1 1 V Power Supply 1 0 0 1 17 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 18 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 23 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 24 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 27 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 29 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 6 Power Supply 1 0 0 1 7 9 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0 Robot1 1 0 1 0 Robot1 1 0 2 0 ia Esun SL3000 comm Status UserID root 4 Library crimson20 stortek com The following table describes the health monitor indicators Indicator Description 1 Comm Current status of the communication channel between the SL Console and Status the library controller Possible icons are ra Normal communications The heartbeat monitor flashes periodically when the SL Console is communicating normally with the library controller A A warning This icon appears when the serve
184. eb application ee Provide a short description about the application Enabled Enabling this directive will allow all the JSPs present in the web application to be pre compiled to improve performance Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 5 On the Web Applications screen click Save Configurations gt C129684 louisville stortek com gt Virtual Servers gt C129684 louisville stortek com C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server Web Applications Save This page lets you add web applications to the virtual server Web applications are added as web archive war files After adding the web application you need to deploy the configuration to propagate the added web applications to the instances The page also allows you to set single signon properties x Single Signon x Web Applications Single Signon Single Signon Enabled Session Idle Timeout seconds 0 001 3600 Timeout after which user s single sign on records becomes eligible for purging if no activity is seen Use 1 for no timeout 2 Back to top Web Applications Web Applications 1 Enema cnavie bsawe poate dete un TF jopet _web appiC1 29684 louisville stortek com opel 2 Back to top Save 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 403 Server Installation and Management 6 On the updated Web Applications screen click the Deployment Pending link in the upper right corner VERSION
185. ed Session Idle Timeout 300 seconds 0 001 3600 Timeout after which user s single sign on records becomes eligible for purging if no activity is seen Use 1 for no timeout 2 Back to top Web Applications Web Applications 1 8 On the Configuration Deployment screen click Deploy Sun Java System Web Server Configuration Deployment Deploying configuration to all instances Deployment Pending The configuration C129684 louisville stortek com has changed locally Click on Deploy to propagate the changes to all instances The deployment begins and screen with a progress bar is displayed 412 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 9 In the Results screen click Close to return to the Web Applications screen Sun Java System Web Server Results e The configuration has been deployed successfully to all available nodes 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 413 Common Problems and Solutions Common Problems and Solutions This section describes solutions to some common problems with the installation and maintenance of the Java System Web Server Windows 2000 Sun Java System Web Server Installation Errors Windows MSVCP60 dll Error If you are installing on a Windows 2000 platform that does not include the Microsoft Visual C v6 runtime DLL MSVCP60 d11 during installation you will see errors sim
186. ed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Click the Robot folder on the device tree The Robot Data screen appears Tools Help System Detail Library 1 0 0 0 gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Apply Refresh 96116 Revision KB Robot Folder Robot Data SL500 Addr 0 1 0 0 Chapter 11 Robot Management 267 Robot Monitoring Tasks v Display Robot Status Use this procedure to display the current operational state of a Robot Note This information is also available through Reports gt Robot Details See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the Robot Folder and click the robot 3 Click Status The screen displays the current status of the Robot Tools Help System Detail Library 1 0 0 0 gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Roboto 1 0 0 Apply Refresh Robot Status Statistics State Hand Status Status 268 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Monitoring Tasks v Display Robot Statistics Use this procedure to display Robot statistics including Get Put and Retry counts 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the Robot Folder and click the robot 3 Click Statistics The Robo
187. el is the name context root of the Web launched SL Console application on the server Proceed to Step 4 3 Start a supported Web browser on your client PC or workstation see Client Requirements on page 36 for a list of supported browsers and in the Location Bar or Address field enter the URL of the SL Console Web Start application http server_ID port_ID opel where m server_ID is either of the following a IP address of the SL Console server in nnn nnn nnn nnn format a DNS alias of the SL Console server m port_ID is the port ID of the SL Console application typically 8080 m opel is the name context root of the Web launched SL Console application on the server 42 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks Note You can bookmark this URL for future logins The SL Console Launch screen appears Welcome to STORAGETEK Library Console wy amp Sun 4 Click Launch Now The Web Start process retrieves the Web launched SL Console application from the server Any updates are downloaded automatically The Opening slc jnlp popup appears Opening slc jnlp x You have chosen to open slc jnip which is a JNLP File From http localhost What should Firefox do with this File Save to Disk I Do this automatically For files like this from now on 5 Complete the popup as follows 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek
188. elete Partition popup appears Modify Partition Click to modify summary information for the currently selected partition The Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Partition popup appears Add Connection Click to add a new host connection to the currently selected partition The Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Connection popup appears Delete Connection Click to delete the currently selected host partition connection The Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Connection popup appears Modify Connection Click to modify the configuration of the currently selected host partition connection The Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Connection popup appears See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 m Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Partition m Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Partition m Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Partition m Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Connection m Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Connection Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Connection m Partitions Design Step 3 m Partitions Commit Step 4 m Partitions Reports 148 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Connection Sample Screen Add Connection x Initiator LUN wpN 200000A0BD080A00 J OK Cancel Description Allows you to configure the connection between a host and the selected parti
189. ells in the library Total activated storage capacity of the library TOTAL RESOURCES ALLOCATED Storage Cells in Library Display only Total number of storage cells allocated to all library partitions Drive Bays in Library Display only Total number of tape drives allocated to all library partitions Total CAP cells Display only Total number of CAP cells allocated to all library partitions TOTAL RESOURCES AVAILABLE Storage Cells in Library Display only Total number of storage cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition Drive Bays in Library Display only Total number of tape drives in the library that are not allocated to any partition Total CAP cells Display only Total number of CAP cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 147 Partition Summary Screens Buttons Refresh Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the library controller database All uncommitted partition changes you have made during this SL Console login session will be discarded The Partition Refresh popup appears prompting you to confirm the refresh Help Click to display online help for the screen Add Partition Click to add a new partition The Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Partition popup appears Delete Partition Click to delete the currently selected partition The Partitions Summary Step 2 D
190. embly has fingers that grasp the sides of the cartridge If the library loses power while a cartridge is between the fingers the manual release screw is used to remove the cartridge A worm gear can be used to rotate the hand to the correct position to access the manual release screw For safety purposes the robotics will be parked in the robotics unit when the front door is opened or when the Open Door button is pressed on the keypad Parked means that the robotics components are fully retracted into the robotics unit at the top of the library To verify the robot is parked look at the lever in the cutout beneath the facade and to the bottom left of the keypad the lever should be to the left 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 19 Robotics Unit The robotics unit is accessible from the front of the rack FIGURE 1 4 Robotics Components L204 _011 1 Z drive assembly 2 Hand assembly 3 Keypad assembly 4 X table assembly 20 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Power System FIGURE 1 5 Hand Assembly L204_024 1 Gripper 2 Bar code scanner 3 Wrist hub 4 Finger release screw Power System The base unit has one standard power supply A second supply can be ordered and installed to provide redundant power to the module components Each supply should be plugged into a separate ci
191. eports on a PC or workstation unless all instances of the SL Console are the same version Report Types The SL Console provides the following types of reports m Log detailed system event logs m Statistics statistical information on library operations m Status Detail details on the status of the library and associated devices such as CAPs drives and robots m Status Summary summary information on the status of the library and associated devices m Version details about library hardware and software versions m Drive Distribution statistical summary of cartridge mount activity for a selected time period a Drive Utilization statistical summary of cartridge mount activity for a selected time period broken into regular time intervals m Library Utilization statistical summary of library activity for a selected time period Report Options Bar The Options bar on each report allows you to perform the following functions m Search a Library Report m Update the report with current data m Save Library Report Data to a File 32 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SL Console Reports Report Procedures For report procedures see General SL Console Report Tasks on page 55 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 33 SL Console Help SL Console Help The SL Console Help displays information for library operators system programmers system administrators and
192. ere found v Module Row Column Cause Vol Ser Explanation 1 6 8 From 0 To 2 PQ 2301L2 Magically appeared to host 2 1 4 8 From 0 To 1 ENO619L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 3 8 From 07To 1 EN1005L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 4 4 From 27o 0 000161L2 Unreachable from any host Disappeared v il gt Do you want to commit these changes Yes No lt lt Details Description Displays a list of configuration errors in the current SL Console partition workspace This screen is a popup that appears when you click Apply on the Partitions Commit Step 4 screen After viewing the error messages you can commit all data in the SL Console partition workspace to the library controller database by clicking the Yes button Possible errors include m A partition has orphaned cartridges See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries for details m Library resources have been removed from a partition m A host partition connection does not have a partition assigned to LUN 0 applies to FC SCSI connections only If any of these error conditions are present the screen initially displays summary warning messages You can view detailed messages by clicking the Details button It is recommended that you resolve all errors before committing the data to the library controller database Optionally you can print the screen data or save it
193. es Btu hour 748 Btu hr TABLE A 6 Power for Drive Expansion Module and Four LTO Tape Drives Four LTO Tape Drives Input power Input voltage amperes 288 Watts 297 voltage amperes Input current 100 VAC 3 0 amperes Input current 120 VAC 2 5 amperes Input current 240 VAC 1 2 amperes Btu hour 983 Btu hr 374 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 APPENDIX B Cartridge Information This appendix provides detailed information about the cartridges that can be used in the SL500 library Handling Cartridges Improper handling of cartridges can result in a loss of data or damage to a library component To handle a cartridge correctly m Make sure the leader is latched every time you pick up a cartridge m Keep cartridges clean m Inspect a cartridge before each use and never put a damaged cartridge into a tape drive or library Never pull tape from a cartridge Never open a cartridge Do not handle tape that is outside the cartridge the tape edge might be damaged Do not expose the tape or cartridge to direct sunlight or moisture Do not expose a recorded cartridge to magnetic fields this might destroy data on the tape 96116 Revision KB 375 Inspecting Cartridges Inspecting Cartridges A defective or dirty cartridge can damage a tape drive Always inspect a cartridge before you insert it into a tape drive or a library Look
194. es You can also add a redundant power supply Contact your marketing representative 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 9 Controls and Indicators Controls and Indicators Note This section describes the controls and indicators that you can use to monitor and troubleshoot the library For tape drive controls and indicators refer to the vendor publications and Web sites Power Switch When the switch see FIGURE 1 2 is in the On position 1 the library and tape drives are powered on When the switch is in the Off position 0 the library and tape drives are powered off Note Earlier built libraries had power supplies that had individual power switches Later libraries have one power switch that controls all power supplies in the rack Power Supply LED The following table describes the power supply LED TABLE 1 3 Power Supply LED Activity Meaning Action On Power supply is active Nothing this is normal Off The power supply failed The service representative might need to replace the power supply The power supply is not receiving The service representative might need power to check the connections and voltages Drive Tray LED The following table describes the drive tray LED TABLE 1 4 Drive Tray LED Activity Meaning Action On solid The drive fan failed the temperature is The service representative might need too high to replace the fan Keyp
195. fies the mechanism or component responsible for the task or fault Note There is no option to clear the event log 96116 Revision KB 271 Library Self Tests Library Self Tests The self test diagnostic utility is intended to help diagnose basic problems with the library A self test is typically run after the library is installed It can be run whenever necessary The library self test routines can be run in either non disruptive or disruptive mode In non disruptive mode all cartridges used in the test are returned to their original locations Disruptive mode may leave cartridges in a different location from where they started Library self tests involve the following process 1 Checks the communication path between the library controller drives and Robot 2 Performs get and put operations to check the health of the Robot and CAPs This includes get and put operations from a reserved cell to a random empty a Storage cell a CAP cell 3 Performs a full library audit 4 Performs mounts and dismounts of diagnostic cartridges for all the drives installed in the library Note The self test will not start unless a diagnostic cartridge is found in the reserved cells Note The self test is repeated for each drive type if a compatible diagnostic cartridge is found in the reserved cells If a diagnostic cartridge is not found for a drive type the mount dismount operation is skipped for the drive
196. fines the location parameters in a library within which the get operation is performed in a diagnostic move There are two types of access orders for a target address m Sequential Access Order on page 278 m Random Access Order on page 278 Following are valid target address types m Storage cells Reserves storage locations as the target pool range m CAP Reserves cells in a CAP as the target pool range m Drive and Storage cells Reserves drives and storage cells as the target pool range a Reserved cells Reserves reserved system cells which contain cleaning or diagnostic cartridges as the target pool range m All Reserves storage cells reserved cells CAP cells and drives as the target pool range Note Selecting the Storage CAP drive system or All option does reserve all the associated locations as the target range However only the location currently being accessed by the Robot for a get put operation is unavailable to the host 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 277 Robot Diagnostic Moves Pool Address Range The pool address range locations are used to supply cartridges required for diagnostic moves to and from the target address range A pool address is also used in a get operation if a target address does not contain a cartridge There is no specified access order within the pool address range The pool address ranges does not include drive location
197. for m Cracked or broken cartridge Broken leader Broken leader latch Damaged write protect switch Liquid in the cartridge Labels not firmly or neatly attached or extending over the cartridge edge Any other obvious damage Maintaining Cartridges It is important to keep your tape cartridges in good condition A defective or dirty cartridge can damage a tape drive see Inspecting Cartridges on page 376 When you store a cartridge m Leave it in its protective wrapping until you are ready to use it m Choose a clean environment that duplicates the conditions of the room in which it is used m Make sure the cartridge has been in its operating environment for at least 24 hours When you clean a cartridge exterior Caution Potential damage to cartridges Do not use certain solvents to remove labels or to clean cartridges because they can damage the cartridges Do not use acetone trichloroethane toluene xylene benzene ketone methylethyl ketone methylene chloride ethyldichloride esters ethyl acetate or similar chemicals m Wipe all dust dirt and moisture from the cartridge with a lint free cloth m Use StorageTek Tape Cleaner Wipes PN 4046289 01 to clean the cartridges These wipes are saturated with isopropyl alcohol Do not let any solution touch the tape or get inside the cartridge Cartridge Requirements Cartridges must meet specifications defined in American National Standard Magnetic Tape
198. front door can be opened to prevent the robot from being damaged When the front door is opened power is removed from the robot Front Door The front door must be opened with a key to ensure that the data is secure If the door is not fully closed a sensor relays the condition to the software and the robot remains disabled 96116 Revision KB 337 Manual Operation Tasks Manual Operation Tasks Manual library tasks are divided into the following categories m General Library Operation Tasks on page 339 m Cartridge Handling Tasks on page 348 338 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General Library Operation Tasks General Library Operation Tasks Task Page Power Off the Library 340 Power On the Library 341 Return the Library to Ready Status 342 Open the Front Door With Power 343 Open the Front Door Without Power 344 Secure the Front Door With Power 346 Secure the Front Door Without Power 347 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 339 General Library Operation Tasks v Power Off the Library Caution Possible equipment or cartridge damage or data loss If you power off the library without performing the following procedure you risk possible equipment or cartridge damage or loss of data 1 Make sure all jobs have completed processing 2 Quiesce the library to make sure the library and tape drives are not in use Note Refer to your clien
199. fter logging in with the activation password the administrator must change the admin user ID password to ensure system security For details about this process see the appropriate library Installation Guide 28 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SL Console Screen Display SL Console Screen Display The following figure and table explain the components of the SL Console screen Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh a Library 1 0 0 0 rLibrary amp CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Status Propertids Statistics Auto Clean SNMP gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 SEE Operational State Operational Access Door Closed Power Supply Module Position Working Status 1 1 True Operative 2 1 True Operative 3 1 False Inoperative 3 2 True perative 4 1 True Operative Fan Module Position Working Status 1 1 True Operative 1 2 True Operative comm status UserID advsrv Librarygreen23 central sun con Component Name Description 1 Menu bar includes the Tools menu provides access to System Detail Reports Tools Menu and the Monitors Utilities Partitioning User Management and Help Menu Log off functions Help menu provides access to the table of contents of the help system It also identifies the version of the SL Console in use Title bar Displays the title of the current screen F
200. ftware 26 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 2 StorageTek Library Console Introduction The StorageTek Library Console SL Console is a Java based software application that provides a graphical user interface GUI for monitoring and managing the StorageTek library Following are some of the activities you can perform with the SL Console Manage available library storage capacity Manage and configure library partitions optional feature View and modify status and properties of the library and associated devices drives CAP robots and elevators Perform an audit on all or part of the library Perform a self test on the library or an associated device Perform a diagnostic move exercise a robot Locate a cartridge Move a cartridge from one location to another Display library logs Display error explanations Download new library firmware while the library is in operation Display context sensitive help SL Console Modes Depending on your needs you can run the SL Console in any of the following modes For details and procedures see Web launched SL Console on page 36 Standalone SL Console on page 38 96116 Revision KB 27 SL Console Security SL Console Security Security features built into the SL Console control both user authentication and user authorization The security features include m User IDs User IDs control user authentication Each use
201. ge based on drive type from the reserved cells mounts the cartridge onto the drive and returns the cartridge to its assigned storage cell after cleaning is complete Manual Cleaning If auto clean is disabled you must initiate drive clean operations manually To verify whether a drive needs cleaning you can use the SL Console to display a drive s cleaning status and the date when it was last cleaned To locate the correct type of cleaning cartridge for a particular drive you can use the SL Console to generate a cartridge summary and drive details report 252 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Cleaning Tasks Drive Cleaning Tasks Task Page Configure Drive Auto Clean 254 Enter Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges 256 Eject Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges 258 Display Cleaning Cartridges 260 Display Drive Cleaning Status 261 Clean a Drive Manually 262 96116 Revision KB Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning 253 Drive Cleaning Tasks v Configure Drive Auto Clean Use this procedure to enable or disable the drive auto clean feature If the library is partitioned auto clean can be enabled or disabled for individual partitions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and select the library folder on the device tree 2 Click Auto Clean and then Configure The Configure Auto Clean screen appears Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 AN Properties
202. ges have a limited life span Refer to your tape drive publications to determine the maximum usage count or threshold for each type of cleaning cartridge When you enter a cleaning cartridge into the library the library controller considers the cartridge to be new and sets the usage count to zero It is therefore important to enter only new cleaning cartridges into the library Whenever a cleaning cartridge is used to clean a drive its usage count is incremented When a cleaning cartridge s usage count exceeds its threshold the cartridge must be replaced You can use the SL Console to display the status of a cleaning cartridge at any time The following statuses are possible m OK The cartridge is still within the threshold m Warning The cartridge has reached the threshold m Expired The cartridge has exceeded the threshold Ejecting Expired Cleaning Cartridges You must use care when ejecting expired cleaning cartridges from the library If you move an expired cleaning cartridge to a CAP it will remain there until you open the CAP and remove the cartridge If you leave the cartridge in the CAP it could inadvertently be re entered into the library by another user 96116 Revision KB 251 Managing Automatic Cleaning Through the SL Console When auto clean is enabled the library controller automatically initiates a cleaning operation whenever a drive requires cleaning The Robot retrieves an appropriate cleaning cartrid
203. he following sections a Library Management Tasks a CAP Management Tasks a Cartridge Management Tasks a Drive Management Tasks a Drive Cleaning Tasks a Robot Tasks Chapter 3 Licensing New chapter describing the new License Management feature a License Key File a Licensing Tasks a Licensing Screen Reference Chapter 4 Capacity on Demand New chapter describing the new Capacity on Demand feature a Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions a Implementing Changes to Licensed Capacity Chapter 5 Library Partitioning previously Chapter 7 Updated for the new License Management feature a Deleting the Partitioning Feature Revision KB 96116 EC000591 July 2008 Revision KA continued 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities New chapter describing the following Library Events Library Self Tests Library Firmware Upgrades Audits Robot Diagnostic Moves a Troubleshooting Information included in previous Chapter 5 Event Monitor Tasks Library Utility Tasks Audit Tasks Drive Utility Tasks a Robot Utility Tasks Chapter 13 SNMP Support New chapter describing the following a Trap Levels a Port Control a Access Control a SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks Chapter 14 Manual Operations New chapter describing the following a Library Safety a General Library Operation Tasks a Cartridge Handling Tasks Appendix A
204. he directory where you want the Web Server installed and click Next Select Installation Directory Installation Directory C iProgram FilesiSuniWebServer Browse Java Enterprise System lt Back Next gt Cancel Hep 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 395 Server Installation and Management 5 On the Type of Installation screen click Express and click Next Java Enterprise System Select the Type of Installation Select the type of installation you want to perform then click Next Express The easiest installation with standard options installed automatically Custom Custom installation based on user choices lt Back Next 6 On the Administration Server Settings screen specify a secure password for the admin user and click Next Java Enterprise System Administration Server Settings Choose a user name and password You must remember this user name and password to administer the Web Server after installation Administrator User Name Administrator Password Retype Password admin ed nomad lt Back Next gt 396 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 a mt Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 7 On the Ready to Install screen review the installation information and click Install Now
205. he partition Assigned Cells Display only Total number of storage cells allocated to the partition Available Cells Display only Total number of storage cells in the library available for allocation to the partition Occupied Cells Display only Total number of storage cells in the partition with tape cartridges present Assigned Drive Bays Display only Total number of drive bays allocated to the partition Available Drive Bays Display only Total number of drive bays in the library available for allocation to the partition Occupied Drives Display only Total number of installed tape drives in the partition with tape cartridges present Assigned CAP cells Display only Total number of CAP cells allocated to the partition Available CAP cells Display only Total number of CAP cells in the library available for allocation to the partition This number includes all CAP cells in CAPs not allocated to any partition This number excludes all CAP cells in CAPs allocated to this partition Occupied CAP cells Display only 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 185 Partition Report Screens Total number of CAP cells in the partition with tape cartridges present Percent Slot Capacity Display only Percentage of storage cells in the library allocated to this partition Calculated as Number of cells allocated to the partition Total physical capacity of the library Buttons Print Click to print
206. i co BRIE 080307File txt Monitor All txt File Name 080308_ MIBFile b t Save Cancel 5 Browse to the directory where you want to save the file and enter the file name in the File Name field Be sure to give it a txt suffix 6 Click Save The data is saved to the specified file and the Transferred Successful popup appears SLConsole Transferred Successful Successfully transferred usrocal share snmp mibs STREAMLINE TAPE LIBRARY MIB txt 7 Click OK to dismiss the popup 336 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 14 Manual Operations When in manual mode of operation the library is unavailable for host access This may be because the library has experienced an unrecoverable error or a library component requires service or installation When the library is in this mode cartridge mounts and dismounts require human intervention Library Safety Thoroughly review the safety precautions in this section before attempting to enter the library It is essential that you follow proper safety procedures at all times Cards and Power Supply The RLC card SCSI MPW RLW or Fibre Channel MPU2 interface card and the power supply are housed inside protective modules to prevent you from coming into contact with hazardous voltages and sensitive electronics Robotics The software parks the robot by retracting it into the robotics unit module before the
207. idge mount activity that has occurred for all library drives during a selected time period Activity is summarized by individual drive location You can use this report to determine how evenly drive workload is distributed across the library and whether some drives are utilized more or less than others Note These reports show drive activity by location To determine whether the drive serial number installed in a particular location has changed during the reporting period see Display Drive Mapping History on page 225 By default the reports are sorted in library internal drive address order Optionally you can change the sort order and rearrange and resize the columns See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 To create a chart from this report you can save the data to a comma separated csv file and then import the csv file into a charting application For details see Save Library Report Data to a File The Drive Distribution Reports and the Drive Utilization Reports display similar information but with the following distinctions m The Drive Distribution Reports show aggregate drive activity for the specified time period m The Drive Utilization Reports show the same activity broken out into regular intervals within the time period Depending on the length of time involved an activity may span more than one interval 1 Select Tools gt Reports 2 Expand the Drive Distribution folder and sele
208. idges Into a Partitioned Library 135 Eject Cartridges From a Partitioned Library 138 96116 Revision KB Contents vii Partition Screen Reference 141 Partition Summary Screens 142 Partitions Instructions Step 1 143 Partitions Summary Step 2 145 Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Connection 149 Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Connection 151 Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Connection 152 Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Partition 154 Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Partition 156 Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Partition 157 Partition Design and Commit Screens 159 Partitions Design Step 3 160 Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results 165 Partitions Commit Step 4 168 Partitions Commit Step 4 Confirm Apply 170 Partition Report Screens 173 Partitions Reports 174 Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary 176 Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary 179 Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report 182 Partitions Reports Partition Details 184 Partitions Reports Partition Summary 187 Partition CAP Operation Screens 190 Diagnostics gt CAP Assign CAP Button 191 6 Library Management 195 Automated Mode of Operation 195 Cartridge Mount and Dismount Activities 195 Mount Sequence 195 Dismount Sequence 196 Determining When the Library is Not in Automated Mode 196 Library and Device Status 197 Communications Failures 198 Library Management
209. iguration changes are saved to the SL Console partition workspace for the duration of this login session To update the library controller database with all changes from this SL Console login session see Verify Partition Configurations on page 114 and Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 113 Partition Configuration Tasks v Verify Partition Configurations Tools Help Partitions Verify Refresh Use this Procedure to verify Partition configuration changes you have made during this SL Console login session This procedure warns you of the following possible errors m A partition has orphaned cartridges See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries on page 100 for details m Library resources have been removed from a partition A host connected to the library does not have a partition assigned to LUN 0 Note This procedure verifies only one partition at a time If you need to verify multiple partitions you must repeat this procedure separately for each partition Select Tools gt Partitions Click the Design Step 3 tab The Design Step 3 screen appears displaying the current configuration of the library Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Partition Left Side Wall Rear Side Wall Right Side Wall 1 Sele
210. ij __ View Summary ay ___ New Configuration kij 1 New Virtual Server ES Migrate ES ___ View Logs iy Documentation View Online Documentation 96116 Revision KB Laid Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 409 Server Installation and Management 4 On the General Properties screen click the Web Applications tab VERSION User in rc Sun Java System Web Server Configurations gt C129684 louisyille stortek com Virtual Servers gt C129684 louisville stortek com S Setti i erver ngs General Log Preferences Monitoring Settings Request Limits C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server General Properties All virtual servers have one or more HTTP Listeners specified When a new request comes in the Server determines which virtual server to send itto based on the configured HTTP Listener You can associate HTTP Listeners from this page Configure virtual server properties from this page x General x Quality of Service P3P Settings x HTTP Listeners Localization x Variables General Name 129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server V Enabled DocumentRoot s Document root for the virtual server Absolute path or path relative to the server s configuration directory Hosts ci 29694 louisville stortek com You can enter more than one URL host separated by commas 2 Back to top HTTP Listeners 5 On the Web Applications screen click the checkbox next to the o
211. ilar to the following E Sun Java System Web Server TOUL Install Wizard amp java Java Enterprise e System The dymanie Ink ibrary MS CPE0 di could not be found in the specfied path C Program Fiesi Suni WebServer bi C AWNNT Systema C WINNT eyste C WINNT C Program Phas Tsui Webserver AoC WIN T eystan I2 CATNT C WINNT Systemi Woer installing Sener Core 414 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Common Problems and Solutions The Web server installation log will include errors similar to the following C Documents and Settings tester Nov 4 2007 1 56 53 AM com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer createScripts FINEST done Nov 4 2007 1 56 53 AM com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer createProperties FINEST ConfigureServer createProperties properties length 1 Nov 4 2007 1 56 53 AM com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer createProperties FINEST Replacing C Program Files SunWebServer7 lib installitemplates properties common properties template to CJProgram Files SuniWebServer samplesijavawebapps common properties Nov 4 2007 1 56 53 AM com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer createProperties FINEST done Nov 4 2007 1 56 53 AM com sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer configureServer FINEST Remove obsolete entries from the registry before installation Nov 4 2007 2 00 21 AM corn sun web admin configurator ConfigureServer main AR
212. ilization Reports 232 218 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks v Display Drive Summary Information Use this procedure to display summary information for all drives in the library The following information is displayed m Internal address m Drive State a Empty a Unloaded cartridge is present a Ready cartridge is loaded a NotCommunicating a rewindUnload drive is busy rewinding and unloading m Drive Type m Drive serial number m Current code version Note This information is also available through Reports gt Drive Summary See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Drive folder The screen lists the library drives and displays their locations Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 Drive Folder car Folder 1 0 0 0 ae carP 0 1 0 8 7 L M R C Address Type Serial Number Code wer gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 9 QuantSDLT320 RBF15Y5693 87 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0 1 2 9 HpUltrium3 HU10608PPH M63S 010 669 0 3 1 9 QuantDLTS4 QD0618AMD0O0037 0 3 2 9 QuantSDLT600 RBO527AMCO5196 51 0 3 4 9 lbmUltrium3 1210009115 73P5 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 219 Drive Management Tasks v Display Drive Status Use this procedure to display the current operational state of a drive The inform
213. ill not allow you to mount an unlabeled or unknown type cartridge into any tape drive Recovery Moves Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1026 and SL Console version 2 40 Using the recovery move diagnostic function you can move a cartridge from one location to another For example m You can return a cartridge to its original location from a CAP cell drive or another storage cell location m You might decide to group cartridges by data type or to move them closer to their assigned drives m You can eject a cleaning or diagnostic cartridge that has expired m You can enter a new cleaning or diagnostic cartridge and move it to a reserved storage cell A cartridge currently in a storage cell can be moved only to a CAP a reserved cell or another storage cell not to a drive A cartridge currently in a drive CAP or reserved cell can be moved to any other unoccupied location in the library See the following procedures for complete details m Move a Specified Cartridge by VOLID on page 242 m Move a Cartridge From a Specified Location on page 246 Before moving any cartridge it is helpful to display or print a report showing where cartridges are currently located and which storage cells are unoccupied See one of the following procedures for detailed instructions m List Library Cartridges on page 240 96116 Revision KB 235 Cartridge Management Tasks Cartridg
214. ill notify you if an initiator does not meet this requirement Buttons OK Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings and return to the previous screen Note Clicking this button does not update the library controller database Cancel Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 150 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Connection Sample Screen Ql et 2 Are you sure that you want to delete the connection Description Allows you to delete the selected host partition connection This screen is a popup that appears when you click Delete Connection on the Partitions Summary Step 2 screen Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields None Buttons OK Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings and return to the previous screen Note Clicking th
215. in the error Format is l m r c where 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 227 Drive Management Tasks a library ID m module ID a r row ID a c column ID Volid VOLID of the cartridge involved in the error Drive Serial Num Serial number of the drive involved in the error Drive Type Type of drive For example Hewlett Packard LTO Ultrium 4 or Quantum SDLT 320 Exception Type of error Options are a LoadError The drive load failed after all retries were attempted See LoadRetry for an explanation of the retry conditions a LoadRetry The drive load was successful but required one or more retries which involve removing and reinserting the cartridge and reissuing a load command to the drive A retry is initiated if either the cartridge is not detected as sensed from the drive except DLT drives or the load command to the drive fails a MediaError The drive signaled a media error during drive load or unload IBM drives allow cartridges with media errors to be loaded while Hewlett Packard drives do not a UnloadError The library could not successfully unload and remove the cartridge from the drive 228 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks v Display the Drive Distribution Reports Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1393 and SL Console version FRS_4 50 The Drive Distribution Reports summarize cartr
216. information is displayed on the SL Console while the audit is performed See Audit a Range of Cells on page 305 for details 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 275 Audits Verified Audit A verified audit validates the status of a specific cartridge location or range of locations including CAPs and drives in the cartridge database If a cartridge address has a verified status of false then a physical audit of that location is performed and the cartridge database is updated The progress of the audit is displayed in the Audit Console section of the SL Console See Perform a Verified Audit on page 307 for details 276 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Diagnostic Moves Robot Diagnostic Moves Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1026 and SL Console version 2 40 Diagnostic moves are used to monitor or diagnose a problem with a Robot The move can be performed with or without cartridges Successful diagnostic moves do not rearrange the cartridges in the storage cells cartridges are returned to their original locations after the diagnostic move is completed However some diagnostic move failures can cause cartridges to be left in new locations A diagnostic move involves the following elements m Target Address Range m Pool Address Range m Move Access Order Target Address Range The target address range de
217. ing methods m To display context sensitive help for the current SL Console screen click the button in the Options bar m To display general help information click Help gt Contents in the Menu bar Help Navigation The left panel of the SL Console Help screen displays either of the following m Table of contents TOC An outline of topics and subtopics m Index A list of terms and topics in alphabetical order The right panel displays the Help topic itself 34 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SL Console Help The top of the SL Console Help screen includes the following navigation buttons Button Action g Back Retraces your steps going backward one topic at a time Forward Retraces your steps going forward one topic at a time Print Displays the Print popup which allows you to print one or B Print Setup 3 T TOC Index more topics m To print the current topic click the Print button a To print a different topic click the topic title in the SL Console Help table of contents and click the Print button m To print more than one topic highlight the topics in the SL Console Help table of contents by pressing Shift Click or Ctrl Click and then click the Print button Displays the Page Setup popup which allows you to modify your print page layout Displays the SL Console Help table of contents Displays the SL Console Help index Tips for Using the SL Console Help m Yo
218. ing with SL500 firmware version 1300 and SL Console version FRS_4 00 storage capacity upgrades must be installed through the SL500 hardware activation utility See Hardware Activation Files for details Note This feature controls cartridge storage cells only All installed tape drives are available by default All cells in CAPs configured for enter and eject operations are available if the module containing the CAP has any activated storage cells Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions This section describes important features and restrictions of Capacity on Demand that will help you to plan for and use the feature in your SL500 library m Only activated storage cells can be used for tape cartridge storage Unactivated storage cells cannot be used for cartridge storage nor can they be accessed by any hosts m The minimum activated capacity is 30 storage cells for LTO only libraries and 24 storage cells for mixed media libraries This is identified as a LimitedBase activation key m You can purchase additional activated capacity in the following increments a FullBase Activates all storage cells in the Base Module a FullDEM Activates all storage cells in a Drive Expansion Module DEM a ThirdDEM Activates one third of the storage cells in a DEM To activate two thirds of a DEM you would install two ThirdDEM hardware activation files To activate all of a DEM you could install three ThirdDEM hardware ac
219. ion TABLE 1 2 shows the number of cartridge and tape drive slots available depending on the type and number of modules installed The table assumes that when DEMs and CEMs are installed in the same library the DEMs are above all of the CEMs as preferred Note Do not install an EZ DEM below an original CEM This is not physically allowed Note The following notes are factors that influence capacity 1 When you add an expansion module below an existing module you increase the capacity of the module directly above it by a Base module 14 storage cells a CEM when another CEM is below it 10 storage cells a DEM 7 storage cells 2 When a CEM is installed below a Base Module or DEM the top two rows on columns 9 10 and 11 of the CEM are not accessible 6 storage cells because the tape drives prevent the hand from reaching the storage cells 3 The lowest module in the rack requires installation of the floor The floor limits the distance the robot can travel which makes the bottom row s in the lowest module inaccessible a Base module 14 storage cells a DEM 7 storage cells a CEM below another CEM 16 storage cells 10 storage cells on the lowest CEM 6 storage cells on the CEM above it a CEM below Base Module or DEM 16 storage cells 4 Cartridge access ports a Base module 4 storage cells one magazine a Each DEM 8 storage cells two magazines a Each CEM 8 storage cells two
220. ion for Installation Target Required 104 966 237 bytes Available 25 695 019 008 bytes Install sre by Macrovision 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 67 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks 6 Review the information and verify that it is all correct Click Install to continue The installation begins and the Installing SL Console screen appears lt Q STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Installing STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Introduction stall Folder se Link Folder Hat Installing ation Summary Installing ll Cornplete Sun STORAGETEK LIBRARY CONSOLE Installing Java Runtime Environment Install Complete Eongratulations STORAGETEKLibraryConsole has been successfully installed e Install Folder to e Link Folder C Program Files Sun STORAGETEKLibraryConsole on Summary Press Done to quit the installer Install Complete InstallAnywhere by Macroy Cancel Previous 8 Review the information and click Done to exit the installation program 68 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 3 Hardware Activation Files The hardware activation utility allows you to activate selected optional features on the SL500 library Note The hardware activation utility is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1300 and SL Console version FRS_4 00 Hardware Activation File A hardware activation file can be delivered to you in the following way
221. ion Module The expansion modules are installed into the same rack as the existing modules You can also add a redundant power supply Contact your marketing representative 6 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library with Mixed Media Storage Cells Library with Mixed Media Storage Cells Mixed Media Library Configurations Caution Firmware problems You can not mix LTO and mixed media arrays and magazines within the same library If you add expansion modules the new modules must have the same type arrays as the existing modules Note Your robotics unit must be part number 314558705 or higher to read SDLT cartridge labels For each library m The Base Module contains the robotics unit and the base unit a The robotics unit has the robotic components and the keypad a The base unit has up to 42 storage cells see note one or two tape drives and a four cell cartridge access port CAP Note The base unit can be ordered originally as a 24 or 42 cell unit If you received the 24 cell version only 24 of those storage cells can be used unless the upgrade conversion bill has been installed Without a conversion bill the first 24 cells after the reserved cells can be used for cartridge storage If the reserved cells are configured for storage the numbering starts with the first physical cell on the left An upgrade conversion bill allows the other 18 storage cells in the base unit
222. ion of Capacity Changes on page 92 for details m In non partitioned libraries all newly activated cells are immediately available for use m In partitioned libraries all newly activated cells are added as unallocated and are therefore not available for use You must manually allocate the new cells to partitions before the cells can be used for cartridge storage See Partition Configuration Tasks on page 107 for detailed instructions Decreasing Activated Capacity Following are special considerations for deleting activated storage capacity Caution Deleting activated capacity is an exceptional situation use caution when doing so m See Delete a Hardware Activation File on page 76 for details on deleting activated capacity m Storage cells corresponding to the reduced capacity will become inaccessible and any cartridges within those cells will be orphaned No checks are made to identify cartridges that will be orphaned See Orphaned Cartridges in Non Partitioned Libraries on page 90 for details You must configure all affected library host applications to recognize the activated storage cell changes See Host Notification of Capacity Changes on page 92 for details m For partitioned libraries a The total number of storage cells allocated to all library partitions cannot exceed the activated capacity of the library Caution You must manually de allocate cells from partitions so the
223. ion popup appears 296 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks 7 Click OK to terminate this SL Console session You are logged off the SL Console The library controller reboots the library This may take several minutes Note You will not be able to log back in to the SL Console until the library has fully initialized 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 297 Library Utility Tasks v Download Code to the Library Controller Use this procedure to download and unpack library firmware upgrades on the library controller After completing this procedure you can choose a convenient time to activate the code on the library See Activate Code on the Library Controller on page 300 for detailed instructions Note This procedure is not used for downloading drive firmware updates Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1026 and SL Console version 2 40 1 Locate the firmware upgrade package img file on the Oracle download site See Firmware Download Site on page 273 a A WwW N Download the code to a folder on your local PC or workstation Log into the SL Console Select Tools gt Diagnostics and click the Library folder Click the Load Code tab The Load Code screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics V gt CAF Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 gt R
224. ions Step 1 Summary Step2 Design Step3 Commit Step4 Reports Rate Partition Details Partition ID Partition Details v Name Value Partition Name PARTITION 1 Partition ID 1 Bar Code Left 7 label characters Assigned Cells Available Cells Occupied Cells Assigned Drives Available Drives Occupied Drives Assigned CAPs Available CAPs Occupied CAPs Percent Slot Capacity Description Print Save To File Displays detailed information for a selected partition Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Optionally you can print the screen data or save it to a comma separated file 184 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Screen Fields Partition Name Display only Name of the partition Partition ID Display only ID of the partition 1 8 Bar Code Display only Bar code format assigned to t
225. is button does not update the library controller database Cancel Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 151 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Modify Connection Sample Screen Modify Connection x Initiator LUN WwWPN 200000A0BD080A00 m Description Allows you to modify the configuration of the selected host partition connection This screen is a popup that appears when you click Modify Connection on the Partitions Summary Step 2 screen Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Initiator WWPN World Wide Port Name of the FC SCSI host bus adapter HBA Sixteen hexadecimal digits You can enter upper or lower case hex digits but the display is always shown in all upper case The screen displays the value assigned previously You can leave it as is or make changes LUN Required Logical unit number of the library partitio
226. is certificate and do not connect to this Web site Cancel 398 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 4 In the Web browser where you opened the Admin Console URL enter the admin User Name and Password and click Log in VERSION Sun Java System Web Server Admin Console ServerName C129684 User Name fadmin Password p amp Sun RIENA Copyright 2007 Sun Microsystems Inc All rights reserved U S Government Rights Commercial software Government users are subject to the Sun iR and its suppleme is subject to e terms Thi ribution the Sun logo Java and Solari trademarks or reg z z s of Sun ems Inc in tl and other C trademarks ar under and are trad International Inc in the U and other N g d trademak in the U S and other countr 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 399 Server Installation and Management 5 The Common Tasks screen appears VERSION LOG OUT admin 4 Sun Java System Web Server Common Tasks Common Tasks To access information about a task select the i info button To understand the terminology click here Configuration Tasks Virtual Server Tasks C129684 louisville stortek com Select Virtual Server C129684 louisville stortek com Se i l Edit Configuration RESI Edit Virtual Server MESM New Instance EY Lay leak ses Start Stop Instan
227. is continuous for each partition even if cell locations for the partition are not adjacent SCSI element addresses for a partition start at the lowest module row and column within the partition then proceed by row until the end of the column then increment by column until the end of the module When additional resources are allocated to an existing SCSI partition the original resources are not renumbered This helps to minimize disruption to the SCSI host SCSI Element Address Examples If a library s base and storage expansion modules are allocated to Partition 1 and the drive module is allocated to Partition 2 SCSI element numbering is as follows Numbering for Partition 1 begins at the first available storage cell in the Base Module and continues through the last available cell in the storage module cell Numbering for Partition 2 begins with the first available storage cell in the drive module PRC Address and ends with the last available cell in that module 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 99 Partitions and Library Resources Storage Cells and Drives All storage cells tape drives and cartridges allocated to a partition are owned exclusively by the assigned host and cannot be accessed by other hosts For example if a group of tape drives is allocated to a partition only the host assigned to that partition can use those drives Storage cells and drives that are not allocated to any partition cannot
228. it is not recommended that you run this audit during peak activity periods Note You cannot stop this audit once it has initiated The audit will take approximately 1 2 second per cartridge slot 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library amp CaP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelfTest RewMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Manage Monitor ae Manage Monitor Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Sequence Monitor Console 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 303 Audit Tasks 3 Click the Audit tab The Library Audit screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Audit Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RevwMove TransferFile amp Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Entire Library Physical Audit Verified Audit o gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 ide 7 E _ A 7 Yes No t Yes No Yes No Start Address End Address Type Cap x Type v a r Faudit Console 4 In the Entire Library field click Yes Then click the Audit button in the Options Bar A confirmation popup appears SLConsole X
229. ition Summary report Partition ID Display only ID of the partition 1 8 Partition Name Display only Name of the partition Cell Count Display only Total number of storage cells allocated to the partition Drive Count Display only Total number of tape drives allocated to the partition CAP Count Display only Total number of CAP cells allocated to the partition Cartridge Count Display only Total number of tape cartridges resident in the partition of Cells with Media Display only Percentage of storage cells containing tape cartridges Calculated as Cartridge Count Cell Count Host Connections Initiator WWPN Display only World Wide Port Name of an host bus adapter HBA with a connection to the partition LUN Display only Logical unit number of the library partition on the host 180 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Partition ID Display only Partition ID to which the host has a connection Buttons Print Click to print the report on a selected printer Save to File Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary m Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report m Partitions Reports
230. ix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 361 LTO Configurations FIGURE A 2 LTO Cell Locations for Firmware Site Mapping COLUMNS COLUMN COLUMNS 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 CAP n 0U vzo o onoono ony o onyono na ony endo o hon a Expansion Identification Label a ahon Yoon oun sBYuonu Voon ou sYuonua 6 7 8 a 9 eres Nao E En Nao ay o z2 loon on aVuonua oowoo Bw ny 2 SYoan oun BYun a L204_010 362 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 LTO Configurations FIGURE A 3 LTO Cell Locations for SCSI Element Numbering Mapping 7 8 COLUMNS 6 r oe ae COLUMNS 3 2 1 n E wi N H I 9 o N z co lt ao N z wi A o e io uu L204_009 Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 363 96116 Revision KB LTO Configurations FIGURE A 4 LTO Cells for Back Wall of Cartridge Expansion Module Base or Drive Expansion Module Base or Drive Expansion Module Installed Above CEM Installed Above CEM COLUMNS COLUMNS 10 9 10 1 1 gt gt 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 a 7 5 g 9 9 o No Module Cartridge Expansion Module Installed Below CEM Installed Below CEM Cartridge Expansion Module Cartridge Expansion Module Installed Above CEM Installed Above CEM 10 No Module Cartridge Exp
231. lay 3 Click Properties The Drive Properties screen appears Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 Drive gt CAP Folder1000 Properties Statistics 9 Drve Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive 1 1 9 General Drive 0 1 2 9 aie Las QuantSDLT320 eee ode Version Drive 0 3 1 9 cae v Drive 0 3 2 9 Serial Number Drive 0 3 4 9 Interface Type Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Configuration THE DRIVE MUST BE IN A CONFIGURABLE STATE LVD Target ID 14 World Wide Name Node nia Port A World Wide Name Port A Enabled Port A Loop ID use 126 for soft addressing Port A Speed GB Port A Link Status Port B World Wide Name Port B Enabled Port B Loop ID use 126 for soft addressing Port B Speed GB Port B Link Status 96116 Revision KB Chapter 8 Drive Management 221 Drive Management Tasks v Enable or Disable a Drive Port Use this procedure to enable or disable a physical port on a drive 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the Drive Folder and click the drive you want to modify 3 Click Properties Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 Drive amp CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Properties Statistics Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Drive 0 1 1 9 oo Drive 0 1 2 9 ie le QuantSDLT320 oe ode Version Drive 0 3 1 9 EHA Drive 0 3 2 9 Serial Number Dri
232. le 41 General SL Console Usage Tasks v Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using a Browser or Command Line Note Before you perform this activity you must obtain the DNS alias or IP address of the SL Console server Depending on how your Web launched SL Console server has been set up it may be accessible only by IP address See your library administrator for assistance Note The command line option is available on Solaris platforms only On Windows 2000 you may need to install a Java plugin for your Web browser before performing this procedure You can download the plugin from the following location http java sun com products archive j2se 5 0_ 04 index html On Solaris platforms it is easier to log in to the Web launched SL Console using the command line If you prefer to log in using a Web browser however you need to download a recent version of the Firefox Web browser from the following location www mozilla com 1 Choose your login method m Command line available on Solaris only Proceed to Step 2 m Web browser available on either Windows or Solaris Proceed to Step 3 2 Open a terminal window and type the following command javaws http server_ID port_ID opel slc jnlp where m server_ID is either of the following a IP address of the SL Console server in nnn nnn nnn nnn format a DNS alias of the SL Console server m port_ID is the port ID of the SL Console application typically 8080 m op
233. lled on a centralized Web server Individual clients can then use a supported Web browser to download and log in to the Web launched SL Console The Web launched SL Console is deployed as a Java WebARchive war file Security Considerations The customer is responsible for implementing all appropriate security systems including firewalls user access etc Server Requirements You can deploy the Web launched SL Console on any Web server that is compliant with the J2EE Java 2 Platform Enterprise Edition platform It is recommended that you use the Java System Web Server Note All procedures in this document assume you are using the Java System Web Server 96116 Revision KB 389 Server Installation and Management Server Installation and Management Installation and management of the Web launched SL Console server involves the following procedures Download the Java System Web Server on page 390 Install the Sun Java System Web Server on page 394 Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console on page 398 Install and Deploy the Web launched SL Console on page 401 Start the Web launched SL Console on page 407 Update the Web launched SL Console on page 409 v Download the Java System Web Server Use this procedure to download the Java System Web Server if it is not already installed on your server Note This procedure requires you to have an Or
234. lls the library might fail and the SL Console might display an error message Make sure you insert the cartridge inside the array not above or beneath it FIGURE 14 1 shows the correct way to insert cartridges into the magazine 1 Check the cartridges to make sure they are correctly labeled 350 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Handling Tasks 2 Insert as many cartridges into the library as you want and as your configuration allows making sure you seat them all the way into the storage cells FIGURE 14 1 Insert Mixed Media Cartridges into Arrays L204_562 1 SDLT DLT S4 cartridge 2 LTO cartridge 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 351 Cartridge Handling Tasks v 4 5 6 Insert a Cartridge into a Tape Drive Use this procedure to manually insert a cartridge into a tape drive Note LTO cartridges can be placed in either LTO arrays or mixed media arrays SDLT DLT S4 cartridges can only be placed in mixed media arrays not in LTO arrays Obtain the VOLID label location and tape drive number from the server console Open the door Locate the cartridge see Locate and Remove a Cartridge on page 349 Caution Potential equipment damage You must insert the cartridge properly or you will damage the tape drive Hold the cartridge so that the VOLID is facing you and can be read from right to left Insert the cartridge into the tape
235. lls allocated to the selected partition based on the currently defined partition boundaries Allocated Drive Bays Display only Total number of tape drives allocated to the selected partition based on the currently defined partition boundaries Allocated CAP Cells Display only Total number of CAP cells allocated to the selected partition based on the currently defined partition boundaries Library Totals Note The data in these fields is automatically updated from the SL Console partition workspace when you select a partition Unallocated Storage Display only Total number of storage cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition Unallocated Drive Bays Display only Total number of tape drives in the library that are not allocated to any partition Unallocated CAPs Display only Total number of CAP cells in the library that are not allocated to any partition Legend Legend for the library map The state of each library resource storage cell tape drive or CAP cell is indicated as follows a Not Accessible white and x ed out Resource is not accessible to any partition Following are some possible reasons 162 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Storage cells have been configured for diagnostic cartridges a Available white Resource is currently not allocated to any partition and therefore available to the selected parti
236. lowing indicators m Device Healthy m Device Error The Status for example online offline and Statistics for example uptime downtime errors and warnings tabs provide more information on the health of the library and devices Other checks m Make sure that cartridges are fully seated and properly oriented in their storage cells m Inspect the X table for any foreign objects or debris remove them if found Library does not power 1 Check that the library power switch is in the ON position on The SL Console 2 Check all power cord connections does not display any 3 Replace the power cord messages 4 Make sure that there is power to the outlet CAP Open LED is on Open the CAP and make sure that the cartridges in the CAP cells are and blinking properly seated The SL Console does Check the SL Console Heartbeat icon not display modified data or information remains static 280 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Troubleshooting TABLE 12 1 Troubleshooting Table Continued Problem What to do Robot Fault or Library Fault Amber LED is constantly on 1 Check the SL Console for any displayed error messages Write down the error messages reported 2 Open the front door Observe and note the state of the cartridges hand and tape drives 3 Make sure that cartridges are fully seated and properly oriented in their storage cells 4 Make sure that packing materials have bee
237. lowing times m An audit request is made through the SL Console m A host request to audit the library is entered You can use the SL Console to perform the following types of audits m Physical Audit m Verified Audit Caution System level problems may occur if a host s cartridge record does not match what is in the library controller cartridge database Physical Audit In a physical audit the Robot visits cartridge locations and verifies the VOLID of resident cartridges and the library controller updates the cartridge database This audit changes the verified status of the cartridge locations to True Audit times vary according to the size of the library The library performs a physical audit at the following times m When initiated manually from the SL Console There are two types of manually initiated physical audits a Entire library audit The Robot visits all cells storage CAP and drive catalogs the VOLIDs and locations and updates the library controller cartridge database This audit is a background process and so does not interrupt online library operations See Audit the Entire Library on page 303 for details Estimated time for such an audit is from less than 10 minutes for a Base Module to 30 minutes for a maximum size library a Specific range audit The Robot visits only a specific range of cells storage CAP and drive and updates the library controller cartridge database The audit
238. m this page x General x Path Settings Indicates required field General Enable Java M Enabled Java Home WS_JDK_HOME Location of the JDK Sticky Attach Enabled Wihether the server attaches each HTTP request processing thread to the JVM only once Note You may also need to change permissions on the top level directory where you installed the Sun Java System Web Server In order for a non root user to start a server instance the user must be able to write to the server directory For example if you installed the server to the top level directory opt webserver7 the user starting the server instance must be able to write to this directory and the https server_name directory beneath it For additional information see the Sun Java System Web Server site 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 417 Common Problems and Solutions 418 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Index A activated capacity 87 92 cell assignment rules 90 decreasing 88 91 for LTO libraries 89 for mixed media libraries 89 hardware activation file and 88 host notification of 92 increasing 91 minimum and maximum 87 orphaned cartridges and 90 partitioned libraries and 91 95 planning 88 activated features Capacity on Demand 87 92 deleting 98 displaying current 75 80 installing 70 95 Partitioning 93 193 ACTIVE indicator 14 audits described 275 276 full library 303 304 physical 275
239. mbly The hand assembly can be in any position when the library loses power Before you can remove the cartridge the hand assembly must be facing the front left arrays and aligned with an empty storage cell See Open the Front Door Without Power on page 344 If the hand assembly is facing right 1 Gently turn the hand to the left 2 Slide the hand assembly along the rail until the gripper is positioned across from an empty storage cell and close to you 3 Continue with the following steps If the hand assembly is facing left 1 Turn the gripper belt FIGURE 14 5 to extend the gripper until the release screw is accessible 2 Use a small flat blade screwdriver to turn the screw 1 4 turn clockwise until the cartridge is released 3 Push the cartridge into a storage cell 4 Gently push the gripper back into the hand 5 Slide the hand assembly toward the back of the library 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 355 Cartridge Handling Tasks 6 Remove the cartridge from the storage cell or leave it there FIGURE 14 5 Manual Release Screw L204 227 1 Gripper belt and pulleys 2 Release screw 3 Gripper 356 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Handling Tasks v Replace a Cleaning Cartridge Cleaning cartridges have a limited life span Refer to your tape drive publication to determine how many times a cleaning cartridge should be used When the
240. n a In the Common CAP table click None m In the Split CAP table clear all the checkboxes 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 137 CAP Operation Tasks v Eject Cartridges From a Partitioned Library Use this procedure to eject cartridges from a partitioned library Partitions with no allocated CAP cells must use common CAP cells Partitions with allocated CAP cells must use the cells allocated to them Note This procedure highlights aspects of CAP operations that are unique to partitioned libraries For general enter and eject procedures see CAP Operations on page 211 1 Initiate the eject operation at the host See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 2 The HandBot places the cartridges into CAP cells accessible to the host 3 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 4 Expand the CAP Folder and click the CAP you want to use Note In a partitioned library only one CAP is listed in the Diagnostics CAP Folder The Import Export screen appears ww Tools Help Diagnostics tart 1 Library 1 0 0 0 CAP Car Folder 1 0 0 0 Import Export Assign CAP Button caP 0 1 0 8 3 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 peraan a A Pahat Faldari NNN Import cleanina diaanostic cartridaes 138 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Tools Help Diagnostics Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 car Folder 1 0 0 0
241. n Tasks click Edit Java Settings Common Tasks Configurations __ Nodes Server Certificates Monitoring Common Tasks To access information about a task select the i info button To understand the terminology click here Configuration Tasks i Select Configuration c129684 oL z taj Edit Configuration New Instance Start Stop Instances Edit Java Settings r Request Server Certificate Install Server Certificate _ View Summary New Configuration Migrate View Logs Documentation ___ View Online Documentation 416 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Edit Java Settings Virtual Server Tasks _ Select Virtual Server C129684 Iz a hay _ Edit Virtual Server ES Add Web Application hay Document Directories RES bead CGI Directories d URL Redirects W View Summary Ww mes __ New Virtual Server ies EEFEEE a Revision KB 96116 Common Problems and Solutions 4 In Java Home enter the directory where your JDK JRE is installed For example usr java Home REFRESH Los out HELP U admin C129684 Sun Java System Web Server Configurations gt C129684 louisville stortek com JVM Lifecycle ies Serviet Session Genaral Settings Resources Modules pumaniicaiian Container Replication C129684 louisville stortek com JVM General Settings Enable Java for the selected configuration and view the server class path settings fro
242. n on the host This entry must be unique on the host 152 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Note Each initiator connected to the library must have one library partition assigned to LUN 0 When you verify or commit partition configuration changes the SL Console will notify you if an initiator does not meet this requirement Buttons OK Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings and return to the previous screen Note Clicking this button does not update the library controller database Cancel Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 153 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Add Partition Sample Screen ADD A PARTITION x Select a partition id 5 Name Barcode Parema Right 6 label characters x OK Cancel Description Allows you to add a new partition You can create up to eight partitions with IDs ranging from 1 8 This screen is a popup that appears when you click Add Partition on the Partitions Summary Step 2 screen Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console sessi
243. n page 240 for details For example Tools Help Reports Search Update Save Log Statistics Status Detail Display Cartridge Summary Status Summary Generated on Fri Jun 27 15 10 09 MDT 2008 D CAP Summary C Cartridge Summary D Drive Summary Library Information Location 0 1 4 1 D Robot Summary Location Type cell Version Media Type LtoGen2_200GB Type data Cartridge ENGOO8L2 Location 0 1 3 8 Location Type cap Media Type LtoGen1_100GB Type data Cartridge 000051L1 Location 0 1 1 8 Location Type cap Media Type SDLT 1 Type data Cartridge DG 0085 Location 0 1 1 1 Location Type playground 11 To update the new cartridge location in the host database initiate a library audit from the host software See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management 249 Cartridge Management Tasks 250 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 10 Drive Cleaning The library tape drives require periodic cleaning to prevent read and write errors The library supports two methods of drive cleaning m Managing Automatic Cleaning Through the SL Console m Manual Cleaning Cleaning Cartridges Note You must use cleaning cartridges whose media types are compatible with the drive types in the library Cleaning cartrid
244. n removed 5 Inspect the library floor for any objects or debris remove them 6 Check the status of the tape drives 7 Close the front door 8 Make sure that the tape drives are fully seated and locked forward by pushing and pulling on the rear of the drive tray Any motion of the tray indicates that it requires reseating and locking down Tape drive is unable to eject a cartridge Manually remove the cartridge from the tape drive Remove a Cartridge from a Tape Drive on page 353 The client computer cannot communicate with the library or tape drives 1 Make sure that cables are securely attached to their connectors on the rear of the library the tape drives and the client computer 2 Make sure that each SCSI device on the same bus has a unique address and that the last device is properly terminated The library is unable to communicate with the drives Drive status on the SL Console displays Not communicating 1 Make sure that cables are securely attached to their connectors on the rear of the library the drives and the client computer 2 Make sure that each SCSI device on a bus has a unique address and that the last device is properly terminated Repeated or excessive drive cleanings or cleaning messages 1 Replace the cleaning cartridge with a new cleaning cartridge 2 Run the Library Self Test and note if errors are reported for the drive 3 Run any client computer based driv
245. nagement Tasks v Display Library Statistics Use this procedure to view library statistics such as the request retry and failure count of the robot and the library uptime Note This information is also available through Reports gt Statistics See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Click the Statistics tab The Library Statistics screen appears Tools Help System Detail _ Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Status Properties Statistics Auto Clean SNMP gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Library Statistics Motion Request Count Motion Retry Count Motion Failure Count Cumulative Machine Uptime 106 day s 7 hour s 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library Management 207 Library Management Tasks v Display the Library Utilization Reports Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1393 and SL Console version FRS_4 50 The Library Utilization Reports summarize library activity that has occurred during a selected time period Robot drive and CAP activity is broken into regular time intervals within the time period You can use this report to determine pattern
246. nceBean gt lt void property accessOrder gt lt string gt Sequential lt string gt lt void gt lt void property moveCartridge gt lt booleanstrue lt boolean gt lt void gt lt void property moveCount gt lt int gt 10 lt int gt lt void gt lt void property name gt lt string gt DriveDiagMovel lt string gt lt void gt lt void property targetType gt lt string gt Drive lt string gt lt void gt lt object gt lt void gt lt object gt lt java gt 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 321 Robot Utility Tasks v Start a Diagnostic Move 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears ioe ust ae _ save Restore Reboot amp CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelTest RowMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 i Manage Monitor Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Monitor Console 3 Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics n sae Restore Reboot amp caP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelfTest RewMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Manage Monitor Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Sequence Monitor Console Defined Sequences e Status State S
247. nd Utilities 313 Robot Utility Tasks v Define a Diagnostic Move Multiple diagnostic move routines can be set up and run simultaneously as long as the target and pool address ranges do not overlap Note This procedure requires sharing of Robot resources therefore it is not recommended that you run it during peak activity periods 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot V Library 1 0 0 0 gt CAP Folder1000 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Selffest RewMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Monitor Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Sequence Monitor Console 3 Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 i Load Code Activate Code Selffest RevwMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Man Monitor Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 sas Sequence Monitor Console rDefined Sequences Add Open Modify Remove Copy State Completed Moves 0 Number of sequences running 0 314 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks 4 In the Defined Sequence section click Add The TARGET screen
248. ng are some possible causes m Partition boundaries have changed m A partition has been deleted m The cartridge has been moved to an unallocated or inaccessible cell through manual intervention If the SL Console identifies an orphaned cartridge it displays a warning message You can then use the following tools to help you resolve and disposition the orphaned cartridge m Generate a report of orphaned cartridges 100 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partitions and Library Resources m Perform an audit of the library m Perform a recovery move on a cartridge For detailed instructions on checking for and resolving orphaned cartridges see the following procedures m Verify Partition Configurations on page 114 m Resolve Orphaned Cartridges on page 116 m Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 101 Partitions and CAPs Partitions and CAPs The cells within each CAP can be allocated or unallocated individually to partitions This allows for the following possible CAP configurations Common CAP m Split CAP Note Split CAPs are available to the SL500 only Common CAP In a common or unassigned CAP all cells in the CAP are left unallocated and can be used by any partition that does not have any CAP cells allocated to it CAP cells are common by default any CAP cells that are not explicitly allocated
249. ng message You should resolve and disposition all orphaned cartridges before proceeding to Commit Partition Configuration Changes on page 117 You can performing any of the following actions to resolve orphaned cartridges m Print a report of orphaned cartridges m Perform an audit of the library m Perform a recovery move on an orphaned cartridge 116 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Configuration Tasks v Commit Partition Configuration Changes Caution This procedure updates the library controller database with all partition configuration changes you have made during this SL Console session Failure to use this procedure before logging out of the current SL Console session will cause all your library configuration changes to be lost Note It is recommended that you follow the Resolve Orphaned Cartridges on page 116 procedure before performing this procedure 1 Vary the library offline to ACSLS and HSC See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 2 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Commit Step 4 tab The Commit Step 4 screen appears Tools Help Partitions Apply Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports To commit your Partition and Host Connection definitions please follow the series of steps below 3 In the Op
250. nge See Design a Partition on page 112 for detailed instructions Caution Reallocating resources can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could be lost See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries on page 100 for details 128 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Tasks Partition Report Tasks Task Page Display a Partition Report 130 Print Partition Report Data 132 Save Partition Report Data 133 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 129 Partition Report Tasks v Display a Partition Report Use this procedure to display any of the following partition reports m Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Displays a detailed list of all resource partition assignments Host Connections Summary Displays detailed host partition connection information for all partitions m Orphaned Cartridge Report Displays a detailed list of all orphaned cartridges m Partition Details Displays detailed information for a selected partition m Partition Summary Displays summary information for all partitions Note The partition reports display data saved to the library controller database If you have made partition configuration changes without commiting the changes to the library controller through the Commit Step 4 screen the data in these reports will differ from data shown on the partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens 1 Selec
251. nguage Windows 2000 Advanced Server SP4 Multi language Solaris 10 OS AMD x64 Price Free Download Did you find what you e looking for today Select Answer gt fa Submit Contact About Sun News amp Events Employment Site Map Privacy Terms of Use Trademarks Copyright 1994 2007 Sun Microsystems Inc 4 In the Oracle Download Center Login screen enter your Username and Password and click Login 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 391 Server Installation and Management Note If you do not already have an account click Register Now and follow the instructions to create one amp SUN Sun Downloads Home Download Center gt Login Your Selection Sun Java System Web Server 7 0 Update 1 Multi Platform English Download To continue please log in with your Sun Online Account Download Center MySun SunSalve etc Ifyou dont have an account please Register Login Register Now Why Register Download Center FAQ Purchase amp Shipping Policies Contact About Sun News Employment Privacy Terms of Use Trademarks Copyright 1994 2007 Sun Microsystems Inc 5 In the Oracle Download Center screen make the following selections m Click the Accept License Agreement radio button 392 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management m Click the Sun Java System Web Server link
252. ning messages Verify Results E x x Warnings Found Some VWWPNs will need re audit Some hosts do not employ LUN 0 Cartridge data may be lost Print le Save The following hosts will need to be reaudited 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following orphaned cartridges were found v Module Row Column Cause VolSer Explanation 1 6 8 From 0To 2 PQ2301L2 Magically appeared to host 2 1 4 8 From 0 To 1 EN0619L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 3 8 From 0To 1 EN1005L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 ja 7 From 2 To 0 000161L2 Unreachable from any host Disappeare iw q i gt Ok lt lt Details 6 Optionally in the expanded view of the warning messages you can do the following m Click Print to print the detailed message data m Click Save to save the detailed message data to a comma separated file 7 Click OK to dismiss the Verify Results popup and return to the Design Step 3 screen Note It is recommended that you follow the Resolve Orphaned Cartridges on page 116 procedure before committing your changes to the library controller database 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 115 Partition Configuration Tasks v Resolve Orphaned Cartridges If the SL Console identifies an orphaned cartridge it displays a warni
253. nning the Web launched SL Console the License Agreement popup appears License Agreement xj Installation and Use of StorageTek Library Console Requires Acceptance of the Following License Agreement LICENSE AGREEMENT Streamline Library Console software IMPORTANT READ THE FOLLOWING CAREFULLY This License Agreement License is a legal agreement between you either an individual or an entity and Storage Technology Corporation StorageTek or the authorized StorageTek reseller from which you acquired the StorageTek SL500 8500 library and that includes this Streamline Library Console remote or local Software BY PROCEEDING WITH THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT GRANT OF LICENSE You are hereby granted a personal nonexclusive license to use the Streamline Library Console remote or local Software and all associated manuals and documentation the Software on any host computers or StorageTek storage subsystems on which the Software was initially installed and that in the event that you upgrade your StorageTek SL8500 library for which the Software was initially provided to install an optional local operator console Console you may use the Software to download the local version of the Software on the Console __LICFHSE RESTRICTIONS bed 1 accept the terms of the License Agreement 1 do NOT accept the terms of the License Agreement 961
254. ns This allows you to configure an SL500 library for applications running on multiple hosts and operating systems Partitioning Features and Restrictions This section describes important features and restrictions of library partitioning that will help you to configure and use partitioning in your SL500 library m You can configure up to eight partitions within an SL500 library m A partition can be as small as a single storage cell CAP cell or tape drive Cells and drives within a partition do not need to be adjacent m Storage cells and tape drives allocated to a partition can be used only by the hosts assigned to that partition Hosts assigned to other partitions cannot access the contents of these cells and drives See Storage Cells and Drives on page 100 for details m Storage cells and drives not allocated to any partition cannot be accessed by any hosts For example you might leave an area of cells unallocated in preparation for future partitioning m CAP cells can be allocated for exclusive use by a partition or they can be left unallocated for common use by all hosts See Partitions and CAPs on page 102 for details 96116 Revision KB 93 System Requirements for Library Partitioning System Requirements for Library Partitioning Note Starting with SL500 firmware version 1300 and SL Console version FRS_4 00 library partitioning upgrades must be installed through the SL500 hardware activation
255. nstaller web actions Postinstall_core moveUninstaller INFO Successfully moved the Uninstall class file to setup directory Log File C Program Files SuniWvebServer7 setup Sun_Java_System_VVeb_Server_install log Dismiss vV Remedy for Windows MSVCP60 dll Error Use this procedure to solve the Windows MSVCP60 dll error 1 Perform a Web search for the following string msvcp60 dll download 2 Download the DLL file to the winnt system32 directory 3 Delete the directory where you partially installed the Java System Web Server on the failed installation 4 Repeat the Java System Web Server installation from the beginning The installation should complete successfully with no recurrence of the error 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 415 Common Problems and Solutions v Solaris 9 amp 10 Sun Java System Web Server Installation Errors Java Home Error If you cannot start the server instance and you see errors claiming your HotSpot start failed and your JVM could not be found you need to change the Java Home configuration of your Sun Java System Web Server V Remedy for Solaris Java Home Error Use this procedure to solve the Java Home error 1 Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console See Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console on page 398 for details 2 Select Home gt Common Tasks 3 Under Configuratio
256. nstalling the Java System Web Server 394 397 Java WebArchive file 389 logging in to the Java System Web Server 398 400 logging in using a browser 42 46 logging in using an icon 47 50 security 36 389 server described 389 417 server requirements 389 starting on a client 37 starting on the server 407 408 updating on a client 36 updating on the server 409 413 weights component 373 World Wide Name See dWWN write protect switch LTO 381 SDLT DLT S4 386 Index 423 424 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116
257. number as the original and you must delete the original hardware activation file before installing the new one Caution Deleting a hardware activation file is an exceptional situation Be sure it is really what you want to do before you begin this procedure Having extra hardware activation files installed on a library does not present any problems for example Capacity activation files that exceed the physical capacity of the library the extra activation files are simply not used Caution Deleting a Capacity hardware activation file reduces the activated capacity of the affected library module This can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could be lost See Decreasing Activated Capacity on page 91 and Orphaned Cartridges in Non Partitioned Libraries on page 90 for details Caution Deleting a Partitioning hardware activation file deletes the Partitioning feature from the library See Deleting the Partitioning Feature on page 98 for details about the effects on the library configuration 1 Use the SL Console to log in to the target library See General SL Console Usage Tasks on page 41 for details 76 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation File Tasks 2 Select Tools gt Hardware Activation and click the Current Hardware Activation Keys tab The Current Activation Keys screen appears listing the currently activated features Tools Help Har
258. obot Folder 1 0 0 0 298 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Load Reboot a Library DiagMove Load Code activate Code Audit SelfTest RcvrMove TransferFile Type a file name and press the Enter key or use the Browse button File Name Type File Load Console Window Browse Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks 6 In the File Name field enter the full path of the firmware package you want to download and press Enter Optionally you can click Browse and navigate to the file location on your local PC or workstation 7 The SL500 library firmware package is a img image file The contents of the file is displayed Review the contents and file name to verify that you have specified the correct firmware package 8 Click the Load button on the Options Bar The Code Load confirmation appears 9 Click OK to confirm the download Note The download process could take up to ten minutes 10 The system begins downloading the code to the library controller The File Load Console Window section of the screen indicates the progress of the file transfer 11 When the code is fully transferred to the library controller the code unpack process begins 12 The screen indicates the progress of the unpack 13 The screen indicates when the unpack process is complete In the Failed field you should see 0 If there are any failures indicated
259. ocation in the host database initiate a library audit from the host software See the appropriate tape management software documentation for the procedures and commands 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management 245 Cartridge Management Tasks v Move a Cartridge From a Specified Location Use this procedure to move a cartridge from one specified location to another within the library Note This procedure updates the cartridge s location in the library controller database but not in the host database Therefore after performing this procedure you must perform an audit from the host software to update the host database Failure to do so will cause future mount requests from the host software to fail Caution Use caution when performing this procedure in partitioned libraries You could inadvertently move a cartridge from one partition to another allowing the new partition to overwrite data on the cartridge 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics and click the Library folder 2 Click the RevrMove tab The Recovery Move screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Library 1 0 0 0 car Folder 1 0 0 0 caP 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Start Reboot Library DiagMove LoadCode Activate Code audit SelfTest RcvrMove TransferFile RECOVERY MOVE Choose source and destination location for move Then choose Start button
260. odule Shipped standard LimitedBase 24 As last module FullBase 42 With any module underneath FullBase 56 Drive Expansion Module DEM As last module ThirdDEM 63 increments of 21 21 21 With any module underneath ThirdDEM 70 increments of 24 23 23 96116 Revision KB Chapter 4 Capacityon Demand 89 Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions Module Hardware Module Activation Key Activated Library Value Capacity Total Count Cartridge Expansion Module CEM after Base Module or DEM As last module FullCEM 84 With any module underneath FullCEM 94 Cartridge Expansion Module CEM after CEM As last module FullCEM 90 With any module underneath FullCEM 100 All capacities assume no reserved cells and all CAPs are configured for enter and eject op erations Cell Assignment Rules The library controller uses the following rules when filling activated storage cells with cartridges m All cells in column 1 are filled first then the cells in column 2 then 3 and so on m Cells within each column are filled from top to bottom starting with the first row after any reserved cells For example if the top three cells in a column are reserved cell assignment within the column starts with row 4 m Once all cells within a module are filled cell assignment moves to the next module using the same top to bottom column by column approach In partitioned libra
261. oes not verify current partition boundaries against the library controller database therefore it cannot identify configuration conflicts that may arise due to other users performing cartridge movements or library configuration changes through the command line interface other SL Console sessions or host applications at the same time you have made partition changes Refresh Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the library controller database All uncommitted partition changes you have made during this SL Console login session will be discarded The Partition Refresh popup appears prompting you to confirm the refresh Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also Partitions Summary Step 2 m Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results m Partitions Commit Step 4 m Partitions Reports 164 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results Sample Screen kg JJ x Warnings Found Some WWPNs will need re audit Some hosts do not employ LUN 0 Cartridge data may be lost Print Save The following hosts will need to be reaudited 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following orphaned cartridges were found v Module Row Column Cause
262. of data related to the event selected Monitor gt Clear Clear the event monitor display 5 To close a monitor click the X in the upper right corner of the window 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 285 Event Monitor Tasks v Spool Event Monitor Data to a File Use this procedure to spool and save event monitor data to a file You can send the file to your Oracle support representative to assist in diagnosing problems 1 Select Tools gt Monitors 2 Expand the Permanent Monitors folder The library monitors you have access to are displayed Tools Help Monitors Window Open Monitors Display 9 CA Permanent Monitors C all CY Error Yarn Info Bi Errors And Warnings Bi Errors 3 Click the event monitor you want to use and then click Open from the Options Bar The system displays the an event monitor window Tools Help Monitors Window Open Monitors E Permanent Monitors C Al Events Bi Error Events Monitor a C Information Events Events Start Spool Warning Events Stop Sgooling ieee 4 In the event monitor window select Spool File gt Start Spooling 286 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Event Monitor Tasks The Save popup appears c 2 50 00 tmp manifest txt RunLatestSLConsole Ink FileName AlIEvents td Save Cancel
263. older 1 0 0 0 96116 Revision KB Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning 263 Drive Cleaning Tasks 264 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 1 1 Robot Management Robotics Unit The Robot provides movement of cartridges among the storage cells tape drives and cartridge access ports CAPs For safety purposes the Robot will be parked in the robotics unit when the front door is opened or when the Open Door button is pressed on the keypad Parked means that the robotics components are fully retracted into the robotics unit at the top of the library To verify the robot is parked look at the lever in the cutout beneath the facade and to the bottom left of the keypad the lever should be to the left Robot Procedures For detailed Robot management procedures see Robot Monitoring Tasks on page 266 m Service Safety Door Operation on page 337 96116 Revision KB 265 Robot Monitoring Tasks Robot Monitoring Tasks Task Page Display Robot Summary Information 267 Display Robot Status 268 Display Robot Statistics 269 266 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Monitoring Tasks v Display Robot Summary Information Use this procedure to display summary information for the library Robot Note This information is also available through Reports gt Robot Summary See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detail
264. ole 37 Standalone SL Console Standalone SL Console The standalone SL Console is a standard feature of the StorageTek library It enables you to run the SL Console application remotely from a PC or workstation that has a network connection to the library Using the standalone SL Console you can connect to any library for which you have a valid user ID Security Considerations The SL Console application interfaces with the primary library interface PLI over a security software layer SSL The SSL provides a secure communication path between the library and the customer s SL Console sessionthis prevents an unauthorized network user from monitoring library activity Installation Requirements You can install the standalone SL Console on a computer meeting the following requirements Platform Solaris 9 SPARC Solaris 10 SPARC Windows 2003 Server 32 bit Windows XP Client 32 bit Windows Vista 32 bit Other Ethernet connection to the library The standalone SL Console software is available for download at the following Oracle Corporation sites User Location Name URL Oracle Oracle Sun Download http www sun com download ind Customers Center ex jsp Oracle Partners Oracle Sun Partner https spe sun com spx control and OEMs Exchange Login Note You must have a valid login ID and password for the download site you are using Contact your Oracle support representative for assistance 38
265. on ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Select a Partition ID Required Partition ID you want to add Options are 1 8 The pull down menu displays all available IDs the default is the next available ID in numerical order Name Optional Name you want to assign to the partition 0 60 ASCII characters 154 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Barcode Presentation Required Tape cartridge bar code format to be used for the Partition The drop down menu displays all available formats previously defined by your Oracle support representative the default is Left 6 label characters Buttons OK Click to update the SL Console partition workspace with the current screen settings and return to the previous screen Note Clicking this button does not update the library controller database Cancel Click to discard the current screen settings and return to the previous screen See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 155 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Delete Partition Sample Screen Rl ie lx 2 Are you sure that you want to delete partition 1
266. on file 3 You download the hardware activation file to a system accessible to the SL Console session 4 You use the SL Console to verify and install the hardware activation file on the target library 5 You reboot the library in order to activate the new features 6 See the following topics for detailed information about implementing specific activated features a Capacity on Demand on page 87 a Library Partitioning on page 93 70 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation File Tasks Hardware Activation File Task Summary Task Page Receive a New Hardware Activation File 72 Install a New Hardware Activation File on the Target Library 73 Display Current Hardware Activation Files 79 Delete a Hardware Activation File 76 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 71 Hardware Activation File Tasks v Receive a New Hardware Activation File Use this procedure to receive a hardware activation file which activates features for a specific StorageTek library Note This procedure is not performed at the SL Console 1 Purchase one or more features from Oracle Corporation See your Oracle support representative for assistance 2 Receive the hardware activation file from Oracle via e mail Following is a sample of the e mail header Subject SL500 Hardware Activation Key CR6636975 Date Wed 23 Apr 2008 19 24 41 0700 MST From Do _Not_Reply SILKS sun
267. ons Bar Tools Help Reports gt J Statistics gt cI Log gt c Status Summary c Status Detail R O Drive Details C Library Details O Robot Details c version gt C Drive Distribution o E Drive Interval Utilization Search Update sae E Display CAP Details Generated on Fri Oct 30 11 10 02 MDT 2009 Device CAP Properties Device Id CAP Properties Size 12 Device CAP Status 60 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Report Tasks 4 Click Save The Save popup appears Save In tmp ia lalla H C CAP Details txt EventLog Error txt CAP Summary txt Hardware Versions txt B Cartridge Summary txt B Library Details txt Drive Details txt C Library Information txt Drive Summary txt Robot Details txt B EventLog Error Warn Info txt B RobotSummary txt B EventLog Error Warn txt B SoftwareVersions txt File Name CAP Details Files of Type Text Document txt v Save Cancel 5 Browse to the directory where you want to save the file In the File Name field you can accept the default entry or enter a different file name 6 In the Files of Type pull down select the format in which you want to save the data HTML Text XML 7 Click Save The data is saved to the specified file Note If the file exists already a popup appears prompting
268. onsole In an existing Program Group accessories zj Inthe Start Menu e Link Folder Hor Surrirriry On the Desktop Inthe Quick Launch Bar Other ams Oracle STORAGETEKLibrar yConsole Choose Don t create icons F Create Icons for All Users InstallAnywhere by Macrovision 5 Enter the location where you want to create the SL Console shortcut icons You can accept the default location displayed or you can click one of the other choices listed and specify a different location Click Next to continue 66 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks Note On Solaris the default location for shortcuts is the user s home directory However shortcuts cannot be created in which is the root user s home so if you are installing on a Solaris platform as root you must choose something other than the default location In this case it is recommended that you choose usr bin or a similar location The Pre Installation Summary screen appears lt Q STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Pre Installation Summary Introduction Please Review the Following Before Continuing C Install Folder Choose Link Folder Product Name STORAGE TEKL ibraryGonsole tion Summary Install Folder C Program Files Sun 8 TORAGETEKL ibraryGonsole Shortcut Folder D Documents and Settings user Start MenuiPrograms Oracle S TOR AGE TEKL ibraryGonsole Disk Space Informat
269. onsole to clients meeting the following requirements Platform Solaris 9 SPARC Firefox 2 x Solaris 10 SPARC Firefox 2 x Windows 2000 32 bit IE 5 IE 5 5 Firefox 2 x Windows XP 32 bit IE 6 IE 7 Firefox 2 x Windows Vista 32 bit IE 7 Firefox 2 x Other a Java 1 5 Plug in the browser will install this automatically if it is not present already m Ethernet connection to the library m Ethernet connection to the Web launched SL Console server Web launched SL Console Updates Updates to the Web launched SL Console only need to be installed on the centralized Web server Once the updates are installed on the server they are downloaded automatically to all clients whenever the application is started on the client 36 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Web launched SL Console Starting the Web launched SL Console on a Client You can use either of the following methods to start and log in to the Web launched SL Console on a client m From a command line Solaris only or supported browser See Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using a Browser or Command Line on page 42 m By double clicking the slc jnlp icon on your client In order to use this method from a client you must use the browser method at least once and save the slc jnlp file locally See Log in to the Web launched SL Console Using an Icon on page 47 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Cons
270. or will not open and a warning popup appears SLConsole Help x Invalid response received from library for the request WARNING Current partition assignment exposes CAP cartridges in assigned partitions The CAP door button push will fail unless exposed cartridges are moved Click OK to return to the Assign CAP Button screen Before you can continue with this procedure you must remove the inaccessible cartridges from the CAP 10 On the library control panel push the CAP Open button 11 The library opens the doors of all CAPs with cells accessible to the selected partition Doors to CAPs that contain only inaccessible cells do not open The library also sends CAP status messages to all hosts with access to the exposed cells Following are examples If the library opens common CAPs only messages are sent to all hosts with access to common CAP cells If the library opens a split CAP containing both allocated and common cells messages are sent to all hosts in the assigned partitions as well as all hosts with access to common CAP cells 12 Remove the cartridges from the CAP cells 13 Close the CAP It locks automatically 14 Once the selected partitions are finished with the CAP it is recommended that you restore the Assign CAP Button screen to the following settings This will help to prevent cartridges from being entered inadvertently into the wrong partition in the next CAP operation m In the Common CAP table cli
271. ot 5 The cartridge is taken from its storage cell and placed in the drive 6 The library returns status to the host that the mount operation is completed 7 The drive performs the read write activity directed by the host 96116 Revision KB 195 Automated Mode of Operation Dismount Sequence A simplified dismount sequence involves the following steps 1 A host requests that a specific VOLID be dismounted from a drive 2 The library controller transmits to the host that the VOLID is located in the drive and the library is available to satisfy the dismount request 3 The library assumes responsibility for the dismount 4 The host command is translated by the library controller into mechanical commands for the Robot 5 The cartridge is taken from the drive and placed into its home cell 6 The library returns status to the host that the dismount operation is completed Determining When the Library is Not in Automated Mode The library is not in automated mode when it is not able to accept host requests The following conditions indicate that the library is not in automated mode m A library main access door is open m The Robot does not automatically mount and dismount cartridges m The device tree in the SL Console indicates that there is a problem with the library 196 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library and Device Status Library and Device Status The SL Console screen displays h
272. ou want to include in the partition You can use any of the following methods to add or remove resources from a partition see Library Map on page 163 for detailed instructions m Select individual cells or groups of cells m Select a side within a library module m Select an entire library module Caution Changing partition boundaries can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could be lost See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries on page 100 for details 160 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Note The partition Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups give you a dynamic workspace to design your library partitions All partition configuration information is automatically saved to the partition workspace in SL Console memory and retained for the duration of your SL Console session This allows you to switch among partition views and leave and return to the partition screens any number of times without losing your configuration changes Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step
273. ove the magazine from the door Instead leave the magazine on the CAP door rails 7 Remove the cartridges from the magazine 8 Grip the handle and slide the magazine back into the CAP 9 Close the CAP door making sure that the door is securely latched 10 Monitor the Import Export Console to verify the status of the export operation The Operation completed status indicates that the export cartridge operation is completed Note If you want to export cleaning or diagnostic cartridges in reserved cells one at a time use the Recovery Move diagnostic utility See Move a Cartridge From a Specified Location on page 246 96116 Revision KB Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning 259 Drive Cleaning Tasks v Display Cleaning Cartridges 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and select the library folder on the device tree 2 Click Auto Clean and then Cleaning Cartridges The Library Cleaning Cartridges screen appears Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Properties Statistics Auto Clean gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Configure Cleaning Cartridges Library Cleaning Cartridges Tape Location VOLID Usage Count Status Cart Type 0 1 6 1 CLN016C lo Warning DLT The list displays the following details for each cleaning cartridge m Cartridge location reserved cells VOLID U
274. ow periods of drive usage Note These reports show drive activity by location To determine whether the drive serial number installed in a particular location has changed during the reporting period see Display Drive Mapping History on page 225 By default the report is sorted chronologically by time interval Optionally you can change the sort order and rearrange and resize the columns See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 To create a chart from this report you can save the data to a comma separated csv file and then import the csv file into a charting application For details see Save Library Report Data to a File The Drive Distribution Reports and the Drive Utilization Reports display similar information but with the following distinctions m The Drive Distribution Reports show aggregate drive activity for the specified time period m The Drive Utilization Reports show the same activity broken out into regular intervals within the time period Depending on the length of time involved an activity may span more than one interval 1 Select Tools gt Reports 2 Expand the Drive Utilization folder and select the time period for which you want to display activity summaries Options are m Last 24 Hours The previous 24 hours broken into hourly intervals m Last 7 Days The previous 7 days broken into daily intervals m Last Month The previous 31 days broken into daily intervals m Last
275. partition to which the library resource is allocated if applicable If the library has no defined partitions Non Partitioned Library is displayed SCSI Element Display only Host SCSI element number assigned to the library resource SCSI element numbers are continuous within a partition even if resources are not adjacent Element Type Display only Type of library resource Options are a CAP a CELL a DRIVE Vol Ser Display only Volume serial number VOLID of the cartridge resident in the library resource if applicable 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 177 Partition Report Screens Buttons Print Click to print the report on a selected printer Save to File Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary m Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report m Partitions Reports Partition Details m Partitions Reports Partition Summary 178 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Refresn Instructions Step 1 Summary Step2 Design Step3 Commit Step4 Reports Host Connections Summary x
276. pel URI and click Update User admin re Sun Java System Web Server Configurations C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Servers gt C129684 louisville stortek com Se een C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server Web Applications This page lets you add web applications to the virtual server Web applications are added as web archive wan files After adding the web application you need to deploy the configuration to propagate the added web applications to the instances The page also allows you to set single signon properties x Single Signon x Web Applications Single Signon Single Signon I Enabled Session Idle Timeout 300 seconds 0 001 3600 Timeout after which user s single sign on records becomes eligible for purging if no activity is seen Use 1 for no timeout 2 Back to top Web Applications Web Applications 1 URI Enabled Deployed Path Description fopel true _fweb appiC1 29684 louisville stortek com opel 6 On the Update Web Application screen make the following entries 410 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management m Web Application Location Click the Browse button and browse to the location of the opel war file on the update CD m Leave all other fields as the defaults m Click OK Sun Java System Web Server Update Web Application Update Web Application from this page You can specif
277. play the Drive Utilization Reports on page 126 Former Chapter 3 SL500 Automated Library Operations Separated into the following chapters a Chapter 6 Library Management a Chapter 7 CAP Managment a Chapter 8 Drive Management a Chapter 9 Cartridge Management a Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning a Chapter 11 Robot Management Company and product name changes throughout Nomenclature changes for hardware activation files Changes throughout but majority of changes in the following chapters m Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files Chapter title changed from Licensing Changes to all screens and tasks m Chapter 4 Capacity on Demand m Chapter 5 Partitioning EC000591 July 2008 KA Updated the following chapters for new License Management and Capacity on Demand features m Chapter 3 Licensing new chapter m Chapter 4 Capacity on Demand new chapter m Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 96116 Revision KB xix Previous Organization EC000591 July 2008 Revision KA continued Major reorganization and enhancement of remaining chapters Changes detailed below Notices Deleted Updated information is now included in the Sun StorageTek Regulatory and Safety Compliance Manual p n 3161956xx Safety Deleted Updated information is now included in the Sun StorageTek Regulatory and Safety Compliance Manual p n 3161956xx
278. port Partitions with common cap configuration pam OS 4 HE DF O8 None Common only Partitions with split cap configuration 1 E6 _ All Split only 5 In the Common CAP and Split CAP tables click the partitions into which you want to enter cartridges See Diagnostics gt CAP Assign CAP Button on page 191 for details on these screen fields 6 Click Apply The CAP Confirm popup appears SLConsole Confirm xi A This will assign the CAP to the specified partition Do want to continue this process 7 Click OK 8 Depending on how your library s CAPs are configured this operation may expose CAP cells that are not accessible to the requesting host s partition For example because a split CAP can contain common cells or cells allocated to multiple 136 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CAP Operation Tasks partitions opening the CAP door may expose cells not allocated to the selected partition If any of the inaccessible cells contain cartridges the CAP door will not open and a warning popup appears SLConsole Help x x Invalid response received from library for the request WARNING Current partition assignment exposes CAP cartridges in assigned partitions The CAP door button push will fail unless exposed cartridges are moved Click OK to return to the Assign CAP Button screen Before you can continue with this
279. pplicable Federal Acquisition et haan and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software or hardware is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications meludmg applicatione which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software or hardware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take al appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software or hardware in dangerous applications Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners AMD Opteron the AMD logo and the AMD Opteron logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Advanced Micro Devices Intel and Intel Xeon are trademarks or registered trademark
280. r 5 Library Partitioning 143 Partition Summary Screens See Also m Partitions Summary Step 2 m Partitions Design Step 3 m Partitions Commit Step 4 m Partitions Reports 144 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Summary Screens Partitions Summary Step 2 Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition Summary P Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated Sere Se Storage Cells Drives CAP Cells Drives 8 1 0 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125 Drives 4 CAP cells 12 Resources Unallocated Storage Cells 224 Add Partition Delete Partition Modify Partition Drives 4 CAP cells 24 Name Partition 1 Barcode Presentation Left 6 label characters Default Connections 20 00 00 40 BD 08 04 00 Add Connection Delete Connection Modify Connection Description Displays summary information for the library and optionally a selected partition Also includes buttons that allow you to initiate any of the following activities Add a new partition Delete a partition from the library Modify partition summary information Add a new host partition connection Delete a host partition connection Modify the configuration of a host partition connection 96116 Revision KB Chapter
281. r must have a valid active user ID and password to log in to the SL Console m Access permissions Access permissions control user authorization Each user ID is assigned a set of access permissions which determine the types of requests the user can submit through the SL Console For example in order to modify the system properties of a drive a user must log in with a user ID that has the proper access permissions When you log in to the SL Console with a valid user ID password and library name the system authenticates your identity and then authorizes your access to the various SL Console functions User IDs To log in to the SL Console you must have a valid active user ID Each user ID must be assigned a password There are a fixed set of user IDs at a site The user IDs include admin customer administrator service Oracle Customer Services Engineer and oem third party field service technician When you log in successfully the SL Console displays your user ID in the status bar of the screen Any number of users can connect to a library through the standalone SL Console or Web launched SL Console Activation Password Before any users at your site can use the SL Console for the first time your library administrator must activate the admin userid with a special activation password Your Oracle support representative provides your administrator with the activation password which is valid for one time use only A
282. r no timeout 2 Backto top Web Applications iNews Enable Disable I Update Delete URI Enabled Deployed Path Description 7mopel true _dweb appiC1 29684 louisville stortek corn opel You can click the Home button in the upper right corner to return to the Common Tasks screen 406 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management v Start the Web launched SL Console 1 Log in to the Sun Java System Web Server administration console See Log in to the Java System Web Server Administration Console on page 398 for details 2 On the Common Tasks screen click Start Stop Instances Home REFREsh Loo our HELP U mir rt 4 Sun Java System Web Server i Common Tasks Common Tasks To access information about a task select the i info button To understand the terminology click here Configuration Tasks Virtual Server Tasks b C129684 louisville stortek com ziat C129684 Iouisyille stortek com wit Edit Configuration ics Edt Virtual Server ja New Instance kij Add Web Application tij Document Directories Wij lal Edit Java Settings kij a CGI Directories kij A Request Server Certificate kij E URL Redirects kij a Install Server Certificate kij a View Summary kij a View Summary ay New Configuration a New Virtual Server ES kal Migrate o hisy View Logs ay
283. r response takes longer than 10 seconds 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library Management 197 Library and Device Status Indicator Description An error This icon appears when the server response takes longer than 30 seconds 2 Userid Userid currently logged in to the SL Console 3 Library Library to which the SL Console is connected and a graphical representation of the current health of the library and its devices Possible icons are i All library devices are functioning normally A A warning One or more devices in the library is offline or operating in a degraded state An error One or more devices in the library has experienced a failure 4 Device Current status of the indicated device If a device type indicator is yellow health or red you can expand the device folder to display the individual device icon health icons and then display details on the specific devices that are experiencing abnormal conditions If there are multiple problems with a device or status alert conditions the health indicator reflects the one that is most severe For example if the library has been varied offline a yellow condition and a CAP has experienced a failure a red condition the library health indicator will be red Fixing the CAP problem will cause the library health indicator to change to yellow The indicator will not return to green until the library has also been varied online Communications
284. rary Utilization 11 16 09 12 00 PM_ 59 28 73 74 0 0 0 D ee 11 16 09 1 00PM 59 81 74 74 0 0 0 ost eR OUE 1116 09 2 00PM 59 67 74 73 0 0 0 i Last Month 11 16 09 3 00PM 60 11 74 75 0 0 0 C Last Year 11 16 09 4 00PM 59 75 74 73 0 0 0 Last Week 11 16 09 5 00PM 59 33 73 74 0 0 0 11 16 09 6 00PM 59 72 74 73 0 0 0 11 16 09 7 00PM 59 89 74 75 0 0 0 11 16 09 8 00PM 59 28 73 73 0 0 0 11 16 09 9 00PM 59 61 74 73 0 0 0 11 16 09 10 00 PM 59 83 74 74 0 0 0 11 16 09 11 00 PM_ 60 08 74 75 0 0 0 1117 09 12 00AM 59 81 74 73 0 0 0 11 17 09 1 00AM 59 44 73 74 0 0 0 1117 09 2 00AM 59 97 74 73 0 0 0 1117 09 3 00AM 60 06 74 74 0 0 0 11 17 09 4 00AM 59 36 73 74 0 0 0 1117 09 5 00AM 59 78 74 74 0 0 0 4 Ml gt 208 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Management Tasks Screen Fields Start Date Display only Starting date and time for each interval Percent Utilization Display only Percentage of time the Robot was busy during the time period This includes time spent in the following activities a Moving cartridges between cells a Moving cartridges to and from CAPs a Mounting and dismounting cartridges to and from drives a Waiting for cartridges to load and thread in drives This value is expressed as a percentage of total time in the interval For example a value of 25 70 means the Robot was busy 25 7 percent of the time The value is calculated as follows Seconds busy
285. rations 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 295 Library Utility Tasks v Reboot the Library Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1026 and SL Console version 2 40 Use this procedure to reboot the library This process involves reloading the firmware from flash memory and restarting the library controller 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics V gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Save Restore Reboot DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SelfTest RecvrMove TransferFile Manage Monitor Sequence Monitor Console Library 3 Click Reboot in the Options Bar The Reboot confirmation popup appears SLConsole Reboot xi A Library 1 0 0 0 will be rebooted All users need to log off Please wait while other users log off Do you want to continue 4 Click OK to continue If the library is online the Offline confirmation popup appears SLConsole Offline s xi D i d Library 1 0 0 0 is currently online Do you want to take it offline 5 Click OK to vary the library offline The Reboot confirmation popup appears SLConsole Reboot xi A Do you want to reboot Librany1 0 0 07 6 Click OK to continue The SL Console terminat
286. ratively unique identifier of an SNMP v3 engine used for identification not for addressing Source The Internet Society RFC 3411 SNMP v3 authentication and encryption keys are generated based upon the associated passwords and the engine ID The engine ID is a string of at most 31 hexadecimal characters preceded with Ox The indexed trap recipients list is displayed at the bottom of the screen This list supports up to 20 recipients with no duplicate entries Users must add themselves to the recipients list to receive traps 332 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks v Delete Trap Recipients Use this procedure to delete a trap recipient 1 Select Tools gt System Detail Select the Library folder from the device tree Select SNMP gt Delete Trap Recipients Enter the Index number of the trap recipient from the list Click Apply O a FF ww N Verify the trap recipients list and make sure that the trap is deleted 96116 Revision KB Chapter 13 SNMP Support 333 SNMP Configuration and Usage Tasks v Set Up Port Control Use this procedure to set up SNMP port control 1 Select Tools gt System Detail Select the Library folder from the device tree Select SNMP gt Port Control A WD N Enter the following information m Port For SL500 tape library Port 1B is the public access port other ports are unavailable on this library m Command
287. rcuit and powered on to provide redundant power If one supply fails the second supply automatically provides power A single power switch on the back of the library is used to power on or power off all the power supplies in the rack m The ON position is 1 m The OFF position is 0 Cooling The fans provide cooling for the library electronics The tape drives and power supplies contain their own fans 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 21 Electronics Electronics The electronics consist of the control path and robotic cards in the base unit Communications include Command line interface CLI over an RS232 port m Public Ethernet port The private port is for future use m Point to point library tape drive RS423 interface Control path card for LVD SCSI or SCSI over Fibre Channel Sensors include m Card temperature Fan operational Power safe Tape drive present Tape drive fault LED RLC Card The RLC card is the processor card It contains all the necessary hardware to maintain the robotics interfaces servo and vision control and the door CAP sensor status The card stores the library capacity information and the volume serial numbers also called VOLID of the cartridges in the library storage cells Interface Cards The RLW card is the LVD SCSI interface card The MPU2 card is the Fibre Channel interface card 22 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Safety Fea
288. re Activation Keys on page 80 for detailed information about the screen fields Tools Help Hardware Activation Current Hardware Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Reboot Delete Refresh Current Hardware Activation Keys Summary Cells Not Activated 1 Total Numbers of Cells 350 Feature Sequence Number Value Enabled Partitioning 102 None Yes MultiPortFibre 104 2 Yes Capacity 99001 LimitedBase Yes Capacity 99002 FullBase Yes Capacity 99003 FullDEM Yes Capacity 99004 FullDEM Yes Canarite ganna EuliMehd Yoo Associated Module Capacity Activation Detail Module Number Capacity Sequence Number 1 Full Capacity 9001 99002 2 Full Capacity 9003 3 Full Capacity 9004 4 Full Capacity 9005 5 Full Capacity 9006 Cells Activated 349 Note If a feature has been installed but the library has not yet been rebooted the Enabled column will indicate No The library must be rebooted in order for the feature to be activated 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 75 Hardware Activation File Tasks v Delete a Hardware Activation File Use this procedure to delete a hardware activation file from an SL500 library You may need to delete a hardware activation file if there is an error in an installed file Oracle will issue a new hardware activation file with the same sequence
289. re Activation Keys Install Hardware Activation Keys Choose Install button above to initiate Hardware Activation File Name DADocuments and SettingsiSL500_104 img Browse Product SL500 Serial Number 522000000004 Sequence Number 104 Comment Line 1 Comment Line 2 Hardware Activation File Details Feature Expiration Value Service Contract Date NIA MultiPortFibre NIA 2 Note If the library serial number in the specified hardware activation file does not match the serial number of the library you are logged in to a warning appears and the hardware activation file detail is not displayed 96116 Revision KB Chapter 3 Hardware Activation Files 73 Hardware Activation File Tasks 4 Review the hardware activation file details and then click Install in the Options Bar The Activation File Installation Confirmation popup appears Hardware Activation Confirmation x Are you sure you want to install this Hardware Activation Key Yes No 5 Click Yes to begin installing the activation file on the target library 6 The library controller verifies the hardware activation file and proceeds as follows m If there are no problems the features included in the file are activated and the following popup appears A confirmation popup appears 7 Click OK to dismiss the popup xl Gi Activation Keys successfully installed If all Ac
290. re activation file from the library See Delete a Hardware Activation File on page 76 for detailed instructions You must reboot the library after deleting the Partitioning activation file in order for the deletion to take effect Note Deleting the Partitioning feature is an exceptional situation be sure this is what you really want to do Deleting the Partitioning feature has the following effects on the library configuration m Changes the library state to non partitioned m Makes all activated storage cells drives and CAPs accessible to all hosts m All existing partition summary information and resource allocations are retained but not usable If the Partitioning activation file is later re installed the partition allocations are restored Partitions and Library Resources Library Resource Addresses Resource addresses uniquely identify each resource storage cells drives and CAP cells within the library The SL500 library and attached hosts use the following addressing schemes m Library Internal Address m Host SCSI Element Address Each partition appears to a host as a separate library this is reflected in the partition address 98 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partitions and Library Resources Library Internal Address The library internal address is used by the SL500 library controller and the SL Console device tree to identify the physical location of each resource
291. rently installed in the drive slot 224 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks v Display Drive Mapping History Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1393 and SL Console version FRS_4 50 The Drive Mapping History report provides an audit trail of all drive mapping changes Drive mappings identify the library internal address assigned to each drive slot as well as the serial number of the drive installed in each slot Whenever this information is modified such as when a drive assembly is replaced or moved to a different slot a time stamped entry is made to the mappings By default the report is sorted in drive slot order Optionally you can change the sort order and rearrange and resize the columns See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 1 Select Tools gt Reports 2 Expand the Statistics folder and click Media Drive Events Tools Help Reports Search Update Save a p E Statistics Statistics Drive Mapping History Drive Mapping Current Drive Slot Change Date Drive Address Serial Number D Drive Mapping History 1 11 4109 4 01 AM 1 1 1 9 131 0000814 Media Drive Events 2 11 4 09 4 01 AM 1 1 2 9 HU1721 0272 3 11 4 09 4 01AM 3 3 1 9 1300001504 gt EI Log 4 11 4 09 4 01 AM 3 3 2 9 RB0527AMC05196 gt EI Status Summary 5 11 4 09 4 01AM 3 3 3 9 1210
292. restrictions apply m The destination can be a drive only if the source is a CAP or reserved slot m For you to move a a cartridge to a drive the cartridge media type must be compatible with the drive type m You cannot move a cartridge to a location that is already occupied m Although not strictly enforced it is recommended that only diagnostic or cleaning cartridges be moved to reserved slots 6 In the Destination Location table specify the library internal address of the destination location by making the appropriate selections in the following pull down menus m Library a Module 96116 Revision KB Chapter 9 Cartridge Management 243 Cartridge Management Tasks m Row Column The following special selections are available on the pull down menus m Min First element of that location type library module row or column in the library m Max Last element of that location type library module row or column in the library Caution If the library is partitioned make sure to keep the cartridge in the same partition it is currently allocated to Moving a cartridge to a cell allocated to a different partition could result in a host treating the cartridge as scratch and overwriting the data Moving the cartridge to an unallocated cell will result in the cartridge being inaccessible to all hosts 7 Click the Start button in the Options Bar Tools Help Diagnostics st Reboot Li
293. ries the library controller applies these rules separately to each partition Orphaned Cartridges in Non Partitioned Libraries Note For a discussion of orphaned cartridges in partitioned libraries see Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries on page 100 In non partitioned libraries an orphaned cartridge is a cartridge located in an unactivated storage cell Orphaned cartridges are inaccessible to all hosts A cartridge can become orphaned for a variety of reasons Following are some possible causes m Activated storage capacity has been reduced m The cartridge has been moved to an unactivated or inaccessible cell through manual intervention 90 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Implementing Changes to Activated Capacity Implementing Changes to Activated Capacity Increasing Activated Capacity Following are special considerations for installing new activated storage capacity m See Hardware Activation File Installation Process on page 70 for details on purchasing and installing a Capacity activation file m If the new activated capacity exceeds the physical capacity no corrective action is necessary Physical cells that cannot be activated due to capacity limits will be activated later whenever additional capacity activation files are installed You must configure all affected library host applications to recognize the new activated storage cells See Host Notificat
294. rtition Boundaries For detailed instructions on defining library partitions see Partitioning Process on page 104 Partition Summary Information Partition summary information includes the partition ID and name and the barcode format to be used on cartridge labels Partition IDs must be unique and can range from 1 8 Host Partition Connections Host partition connections identify the hosts that are able to access a partition Each partition appears to the host as a separate library module A host can control one or more partitions In addition it is possible for more than one host to control a single SCSI partition but it is recommended that you exercise caution in implementing this configuration as some host applications may not allow for resource sharing A partition can have one or more host partition connections The host partition connection configuration is user defined and consists of the following information m World Wide Port Name of the host bus adapter m Port number of the library Fibre Channel card Logical unit number LUN of the partition on the host 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 95 Partition Planning See Configure a Host Partition Connection on page 111 for detailed instructions on defining this information Partition Boundaries Partition boundaries identify the storage cells drives and CAP cells that are part of each partition Only unallocated cells can be added to a par
295. rtridge Expansion Module Installed Below CEM Installed Below CEM L204_561 96116 Revision KB Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 369 Specifications Specifications The following pages provide the following specifications m Library and Rack Dimensions on page 371 Library and Rack Clearances on page 372 Library Component Weights on page 373 Library Environment Specifications on page 373 Power Specifications on page 374 For more specific tape drive and cartridge information refer to the vendor Web site or documentation 370 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Specifications FIGURE A 9 Library and Rack Dimensions L L7 L204_045 1 48 3 cm 19 0 in width of front of Base Module with flange 2 35 6 cm 14 0 in height of Base Module 3 35 6 cm 14 0 in height of expansion module 4 46 5 cm 18 3 in distance between rack holes 5 Original design modules 60 9 cm 24 0 in to 86 4 cm 34 0 in optimally 74 cm 29 in front to rear rack mounting distance EZ install modules 55 9 cm 22 0 in to 78 7 cm 31 0 in optimally 66 cm 26 in front to rear rack mounting distance with optional extensions depths up to 94 cm 37 in 6 44 5 cm 17 5 in width of back of Base Module 96116 Revision KB Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 37
296. rved storage cells are configured for storage the numbering starts there The CAP cells also can be configured as storage cells m Drive expansion modules and Cartridge Expansion Modules can be added to a standard rack to accommodate various storage cell and tape drive configurations Note You must have a 50 cartridge capacity base unit either from the initial order or with the upgrade conversion bill before you can order an expansion module See Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications for detailed diagrams and dimensions LTO Library Internal Addressing The numbering scheme uses the library module row and column scheme Four integers are used to represent the cartridge and tape drive slots as viewed from the front of the library 1 Library number always 0 2 Library module number 1 top of rack through 5 bottom of rack 3 Row number 1 through 9 Base Module or 1 through 12 expansion module 4 Column number 1 through 9 for Base Module and Drive Expansion Module 1 through 11 for Cartridge Expansion Module See LTO Storage Cell and Drive Capacities on page 5 for more information 4 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library with LTO Storage Cells LTO Storage Cell and Drive Capacities Note Your software might conflict with the following information Refer to your software publication for unique information TABLE 1 1 shows the number of cartridge and
297. s Note The address ranges are in the Library Module Row and Column format Note The pool address ranges cannot contain drive locations Move Access Order Sequential Access Order In a sequential access order diagnostic move the Robot performs a get operation starting with the first location in the target address ranges and then continues visiting the locations sequentially through the range until it completes the requested number of moves Note If you choose not to move cartridges the get put operations are not performed The Robot just positions itself at the target and pool addresses Random Access Order In a random access order diagnostic move the Robot randomly picks a location in the target address range to get a cartridge The Robot can also visit the same location in the in the target address range multiple times to get a cartridge The random access routine ends after the requested number of moves is complete If you choose not to move cartridges the get put operations are not performed The Robot just positions itself at the target and pool addresses 278 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Diagnostic Moves Diagnostic Move Control Functions The following options are available to manage the moves currently open To Select Menu Option Notes Start File gt Start Sequence Pause File gt Pause Sequence Stops all diagnostic moves but maintains the current
298. s Task Page Locate and Remove a Cartridge 349 Insert Cartridges into Storage Cells 350 Insert a Cartridge into a Tape Drive 352 Remove a Cartridge from a Tape Drive 353 Remove a Cartridge from the Gripper Assembly 355 Replace a Cleaning Cartridge 353 348 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Cartridge Handling Tasks v Locate and Remove a Cartridge To locate a particular cartridge inside the library 1 Open the door Locate the particular cartridge by its VOLID volume ID label and storage cell Remove the cartridge from the cell by sliding the cartridge out A WD N Close the library door 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 349 Cartridge Handling Tasks v Insert Cartridges into Storage Cells Depending on the version and configuration of your library some storage cells cannot be used See Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications for details Note You do not have to insert a cartridge into every storage cell The library automatically audits cartridges and empty cells as part of its initialization routine Note LTO cartridges can be placed in either LTO arrays or mixed media arrays SDLT DLT S4 cartridges can only be placed in mixed media arrays not LTO arrays Caution Inserting the cartridges correctly is critical for library operation If you do not orient the cartridges correctly or do not insert them all the way into the storage ce
299. s Indicator a LED is normally not lit a LED is lit when the library experiences a failure or is ina non ready state Open Door Indicator a LED flashes amber when the Open Door button is pressed a LED is solid amber when the robot is parked in the robotics unit a LED flashes during initialization and audit m LED is not lit when the library is ready for customer use Button When pressed 1 Software allows the current job to complete This could take a while 2 Software retracts the robot into the robotics unit so that it will not be damaged when you open the door with the key Open CAP Indicator m LED is amber when any CAP doors are open a LED is not lit when all CAP doors are shut Button Button is used to open all CAP doors in a rack TABLE 1 6 Keypad Service Required LED Activity Meaning Action Flashing The redundant component failed The service representative might need to replace the failed redundant component such as power supply tape drive or fan Diagnostics are running Nothing this is normal Diagnostics failed The service representative might need to check the log_error file for the result code and perform the appropriate action Door is open Close and lock the door On solid The non redundant component failed The service representative might need to This includes the last working check the log_error and component of a redundant set of log_warning files
300. s Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 0 rCAP Folder 9 CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 0 Cap Data CAP 1 2 31 2 0 Internal Addr Access State Reserved Reserver gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 0 123120 online false none 7 Elevator Folder 1 0 0 0 0 7 Power Supply Folder 1 0 0 0 A Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0 96116 Revision KB 211 CAP Management Tasks CAP Management Tasks Task Page Display CAP Summary Information 213 Display Current CAP Status 214 Display CAP Properties 215 212 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CAP Management Tasks v Display CAP Summary Information Use this procedure to display summary information for all CAPsin the library Note This information is also available through Reports gt CAP Summary See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the CAP folder The screen lists all the library CAPs and their locations Tools Help System Detail apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 CAP Folder i car Folder 1 0 0 0 an aa gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 SL500 L MR C Addr CAP State Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 0108 96116 Revision KB Chapter 7 CAP Management 213 CAP Management Tasks v Display Current CAP Status Use this procedure to display the current operational s
301. s m Via e mail from Oracle Corporation m Installed by your Oracle support representative The hardware activation file is a digitally signed image img file containing one or more activation keys for features you have purchased In order to ensure that features are activated on the correct library the hardware activation file includes the serial number of the target library and can only be installed on that library Each hardware activation file is assigned a unique sequence number The sequence number ensures that only one instance of a hardware activation file can be installed on a library at a time SL500 hardware activations are cumulative When you install a new hardware activation file the included features are added to the features already activated on the library SL500 activation keys currently do not expire 96116 Revision KB 69 Hardware Activation File Tasks Hardware Activation File Tasks This section provides detailed instructions for all tasks involved in installing and managing hardware activation files for library features Hardware Activation File Installation Process Following is a summary of the hardware activation file installation process Optionally you can choose to have this process done by your Oracle support representative 1 You purchase one or more features for a specific Oracle StorageTek library from Oracle Corporation 2 Oracle sends you an e mail with an attached hardware activati
302. s Reboot Click to reboot the library Delete Click to delete the selected hardware activation file from the library Refresh Click to refresh the display with current data from the library controller database Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also m Hardware Activation gt Install Hardware Activation Keys 82 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation Screen Reference Hardware Activation gt Install Hardware Activation Keys Sample Screen Tools Help Hardware Activation Reboot Install Current Hardware Activation Keys I Install Hardware Activation Keys Choose Install button above to initiate Hardware Activation File Name D ADocuments and Settings SL500_104 img Browse Product SL500 Serial Number 522000000004 Sequence Number 104 Comment Line 1 Comment Line 2 Hardware Activation File Details Feature Expiration Value Service Contract Date MA MultiPortFibre NIA 2 Description Allows you to display the contents of a new hardware activation file and install it on the library You can modify the layout and display of this screen See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 for details Screen Fields File Name Required Enter the full path of the hardware activation file you want to install on the library Optionally you can click Browse and navigate to the file location The
303. s of library activity over time and whether there are peak and low periods of usage By default the report is sorted chronologically by time interval Optionally you can change the sort order and rearrange and resize the columns See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 To create a chart from this report you can save the data to a comma separated csv file and then import the csv file into a charting application For details see Save Library Report Data to a File 1 Select Tools gt Reports 2 Expand the Library Utilization folder and select the time period for which you want to display summary activity Options are m Last 24 Hours The previous 24 hours broken into hourly intervals m Last 7 Days The previous 7 days broken into daily intervals m Last Month The previous 31 days broken into daily intervals m Last Year The previous 52 weeks broken into weekly intervals The selected report is displayed Tools Help Reports Search Update Save o E Statistics Library Utilization Last 24 Hours gt c Log v Start Date Percent Utilization Mounts Dismounts Moves CAP Enters CAP Ejects gt c Status Summary 11 16 09 6 00 AM 59 33 73 73 0 0 0 a amp C Status Detail 1116 09 7 00AM 59 83 74 74 0 0 0 L 1116 09 8 00AM 59 78 74 74 0 0 0 al Version 11 16 09 9 00AM 59 91 74 73 0 0 0 E Drive Distribution 11 16 09 10 00 AM 159 64 74 74 0 0 0 J Drive Utilization 11 16 09 11 00AM 60 28 74 74 0 0 0 C Lib
304. s of Intel Corporation All SPARC trademarks are used under license and are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International Inc UNIX is a registered trademark licensed through X Open Company Ltd This software or hardware and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services ii SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Contents Summary of Changes xix Preface xxiii Related Documentation xxiii Documentation Support and Training xxv Oracle Welcomes Your Comments xxv 1 SL500 Introduction 1 Views and Locations 2 Library with LTO Storage Cells 4 LTO Library Configurations 4 LTO Library Internal Addressing 4 LTO Storage Cell and Drive Capacities 5 Adding LTO Storage Cell Capacity 6 Library with Mixed Media Storage Cells 7 Mixed Media Library Configurations 7 Mixed Media Library Internal Addressing 7 Mixed Media Storage Cell and Drive Capacities 8 Adding Mixed Media Storage Cell Capacity 9 Controls and Indicators 10 Power Switch 10 Power Supply LED 10 Drive Tray LED 10 Keypad 10 RLC Card Indicators 14
305. s procedure to delete a partition from the library The following changes are made to the library partition configuration m All resources allocated to the partition are marked available a All host connections for the partition are deleted The partition ID is deleted Caution Deleting partitions can result in orphaned cartridges and data that could be lost See Orphaned Cartridges in Partitioned Libraries on page 100 for details Note Deleting all partitions from the library causes the library state to change to non partitioned All storage cells drives and CAPs will be accessible to all hosts 1 Select Tools gt Partitions and click the Summary Step 2 tab The Summary Step 2 screen appears Tools Help Partitions Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Total Library Resources Partition Summary Storage Cells 349 Partition Allocated Allocated Allocated pace i Number Storage Cells Drives CAP Cells Drives 8 CAP cells 36 Resources Allocated Storage Cells 125 Drives 4 CAP cells uss Resources Unallocated Storage Cells 224 Add Partition Delete Partition Modify Partition Drives 4 CAP cells 24 2 In the Partition Summary section click the partition you want to remove 3 Click Delete Partition A confirmation popup appears Ll ill Are you sure that you want to delet
306. s the screens you can access See SL Console Security on page 28 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 51 General SL Console Usage Tasks 3 Click Log on 52 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General SL Console Usage Tasks v Log Off the SL Console Note Before you log off make sure all operations for the current SL Console session have completed for example code loads audits diagnostic moves 1 From any SL Console screen select Tools gt Log Off The Confirm popup appears SLConsole Confirm A Do you want to log off SLConsole session Note To remain logged in to the SL Console click Cancel You are returned to the originating screen without logging off 2 Click OK You are logged off the SL Console and the Login screen appears Ro Sun storacetek LIBRARY CONSOLE User ID Password Library 3 Click Exit to close the SL Console 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 53 General SL Console Usage Tasks v Change a User Password Use this procedure to change the password for a user account 1 Log in to the SL Console using any of the modes available to you Web launched SL Console or standalone SL Console You must log in using the user account you want to modify 2 Select Tools gt User Mgmt The User Management screen appears
307. sage Count Status OK warning expired Cartridge Type for example LTO SDLT 260 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 v Display Drive Cleaning Status Drive Cleaning Tasks Use this procedure to display the current cleaning status of a drive 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the Drive Folder and select the drive you want to display 3 Click Status Note You can schedule manual drive cleaning by monitoring the Drive needs cleaning status Tools Help System Detail Library 1 0 0 0 gt Car Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Drive 0 1 1 9 Drive 0 1 2 9 Drive 0 3 1 9 Drive 0 3 2 9 Drive 0 3 4 9 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Status Properties Statistics Status Drive State Drive heeds cleaning Apply Refresh Drive Enclosure LM R C Address FanWorking Fan Status Temp State Temp degC 27 0 1 1 9 True Operative Ok 96116 Revision KB Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning 261 Drive Cleaning Tasks v Clean a Drive Manually Your library could contain more than one type of drive So before initiating a clean job make sure that the system cells have the appropriate cleaning cartridges for the drives being cleaned Generate a cartridge summary and drive details report to verify the cleaning cartridges present in the library Note To display a list of cleaning cartridges see
308. sical v Drive 0 2 3 9 Vendor STK Drive 0 2 4 9 Serial Number 522000000383 Module Count 2 Total Cell Count 118 Empty Cell Count 106 Drive Count 4 CAP Cell Count 15 gt Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Library Interface TCPAP DNS Domain Name IP Address 129 80 81 101 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 MAC Address 00 10 4F 02 BD 2D Library Host Interface REBOOT LIBRARY FOR CHANGES TO TAKE AFFECT Interface Type Fibre LVD Target ID nia World Wide Name Node 00104f00079eb93 Port A World Wide Name 00104f00079eb94 Port A Enabled Port A Loop ID use 126 for soft addressing Not Acquired Port A Speed GB Not Acquired Port A Topology Unknown 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library Management 201 Library Management Tasks v Set the Library Fibre Channel Port Address If the control path for the library is Fibre Channel you must enable the Library s Fibre Channel Port port A The Fibre Channel Port A address locates the library s Port A on the Fibre Channel loop 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Select Properties gt General The screen displays detailed information about the library Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh VA Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 Status Properties Statistics Auto Clean SNMP ji Orive Folgar 0 0 0 General Library Controller Module Drive 0 1 2 9
309. ss fields select the library internal addresses of the starting and ending locations of the cartridge pool you want to use 8 Click Next The Sequence screen appears xi Name DM_0 Move Count 10 z Access Order Sequential z Move Type Robot amp Cartridge Robot Only Disable pre move cartridge compatibility check faster lt Previous Finish Cancel 9 Complete the Sequence screen as follows See Move Access Order on page 278 for details m Name of the diagnostic move Move Count specify a number between 1 and 5000 Access order Sequential or Random Move Type Robot and Cartridge or Robot Only Disable pre move cartridge compatibility check 316 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks 10 Click Finish to complete the setup The Diagnostic Move Manage screen appears The diagnostic sequence you have just defined is listed in the Defined Sequences section Tools Help Diagnostics amp CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit Selffest RewMove TransferFile Manage Monitor gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Sequence Monitor Console State Stopped Completed Moves 0 Number of sequences running 0 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 317 Robot Utility Tasks v Manage Diagnostic Move
310. ssions depending on the directory you are installing to If so use the following steps a cd extraction_directory where extraction_directory is the directory to which you extracted the compressed Java Web Server files b xhost c sudo setup 2 On the Welcome screen click Next Welcome Welcome to the Sun Java System Web Server 7 0U1 installation wizard This wizard is used to install the Web Server Java Enterprise System Back Next gt Cancel Help 394 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Server Installation and Management 3 On the Software License Agreement screen click the Yes radio button and click Next Software License Agreement Sun Microsystems Inc Sun SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT SLA and ENTITLEMENT for SOFTWARE Java Enterprise IA ENTITLEMENT for SOFTWARE Capitalized terms not defined in this Entitlement have the meanings ascribed to them in the SLA attached System below as Section B These terms will supersede any inconsistent or conflicting terms in the SLA Licensee You The entity receiving the Software from Sun Effective Date Date You receive the Software Software Solaris Enterprise System which may include the following 4 Do you agree with the terms ofthis license Yes No Back Next Cancel Help 4 On the Select Installation Directory screen specify t
311. t Step 4 Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report Partitions Reports Partition Details Partitions Reports Partition Summary 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 175 Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step2 Design Step3 Commit Step4 Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Cartridge Cell and Media Summary Cell Partition Partition SCSI Element Li hes sml Status Id Name Element Type ED 1 i 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1000 CELL 1 2 j4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1001 CELL 1 3 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1002 CELL 1 4 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1003 CELL 1 5 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1004 CELL 1 6 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1005 CELL 1 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1006 CELL 1 8 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1007 CELL 1 9 4 Assigned 1 PARTITION 1008 CELL 2 3 1 Assigned 6 sixer 1000 CELL 2 4 1 Assigned 6 sixer 1001 CELL 2 3 2 Assigned 6 sixer 1002 CELL 2 4 2 Assigned 6 sixer 1003 CELL 2 3 3 Assigned 6 sixer 1004 CELL 2 4 3 Assigned 6 sixer 1005 CELL a la L PEET EOE E e P aaan Tari E Print Save To File Description
312. t Statistics screen appears Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Statistics 7 Get Operation Count Get Retry Count Put Operation Count Put Retry Count 96116 Revision KB Chapter 11 Robot Management 269 Robot Monitoring Tasks 270 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities Library Events The library controller continually monitors library operations and logs all events Events are stored under three headings Communication events Includes host to library library to library and library to drive communications m Error event Each error event is assigned a four digit hexadecimal action code m Warning events Indicate a loss of performance or conditions that may be indicative of future fatal errors Event Monitors You or your Oracle support representative can use the SL Console monitors to review library events You can spool the event monitor information to a text file The following information can help to diagnose the cause of the event m Date time stamp Identifies when the event occurred m Action codes Identifies the command that was issued such as load drive m Result codes Identifies the result of the requested action n Known service plan KSP diagnosis Identi
313. t Tools gt Partitions and click the Reports tab The Reports screen appears Tools Help Partitions Refresh Instructions Step 1 Y Summary Step 2 Design Sten 3 Commit Step 4 Reports Please select a report to display v 130 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Tasks 2 In the pull down menu select the report you want to display The screen is updated with current data from the library controller database Tools Help Partitions Partitions as of 4 30 08 3 16 PM Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 Reports NOTE The reports in this menu reflect only the current partition definitions stored on the library Any changes to the partition definitions made in the Design tab will be reflected in the reports only after they are committed Partition Summary a Mediain Storage Partition Partition Storage Storage Cells wi CAPs Total ID Name Cells z Media Cells Media 1 Part1 36 7 19 44 2 Part 2 35 i 2 86 lo 1 The Total Media column includes media currently found in CAPs drives and storage cells Print Save To File 3 If you want to print the report data or save it to a file see the following procedures a Print Partition Report Data on page 132 m Save Partition Report Data on page 133 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning
314. t server software publication for instructions 3 Move the power on off switch to the OFF position 0 340 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General Library Operation Tasks v Power On the Library To power on the library 1 Close and lock the front door if the door is open 2 Press the power switch on the top right corner of the back of the library to the ON 1 position 96116 Revision KB Chapter 14 Manual Operations 341 General Library Operation Tasks v Return the Library to Ready Status To return the library to ready status 1 Make sure cartridges are inserted correctly in the storage cells or tape drives and that they do not block the path of the X table assembly 2 Close the door and lock it by turning the key counterclockwise put the key in a safe place 3 Make sure the power switch are set to the ON position 1 4 Check the status display of the SL Console to make sure the library goes to Ready Status when initialization and audit are complete 5 Enter the system command to place all tape drives online 6 When all tape drives are online enter the command to place the library online 342 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 General Library Operation Tasks v Open the Front Door With Power To open the front door when library power exists 1 Press the Open Door button on the keypad The software allows the current job to complete The softwar
315. tallation wizard you can click Cancel to cancel the installation or Previous to return to the previous screen and re enter information D STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Introduction Introduction InstallAnywhere will guide you through the installation of STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Itis strongly recommended that you quit all programs before continuing with this installation Click the Next button to proceed to the next screen If you want to change something on a previous screen click the Previous button You may cancel this installation at any time by clicking the Cancel button 3 Review the information and click Next The Choose Install Folder screen appears 2 STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Choose Install Folder Introduction Please choose a destination folder for this installation Where Would You Like to Install C Program Files Sun STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Restore Default Folder Choose sion 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 65 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks 4 Specify where you want to install the SL Console program You can accept the default location displayed or you can click Choose to browse to a different directory Click Next to continue The Choose Shortcut Folder screen appears lt Q STORAGETEKLibraryConsole Choose Shortcut Folder Introduction Where would you like to create product icons In anew Program Group STORAGETEKLibraryC
316. tate of a CAP Note This information is also available on the CAP Details report See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions 1 Select Tools gt System Detail 2 Expand the CAP Folder and click the CAP you want to display 3 Click Status The screen displays the current status of the selected CAP Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 CAP car Folder 1 0 0 0 EIA Provan caP 0 1 0 8 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 CAP Status Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Locked CAP State Status CAP Cartridges Location Cartridge 0 1 3 8 EN1005 0 1 4 8 EN0619 214 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CAP Management Tasks Display CAP Properties Use this procedure to display static information for a CAP including the serial number and number of cells Note This information is also available through Reports gt CAP Details See Display a Library Report on page 56 for detailed instructions Select Tools gt System Detail Expand the CAP Folder and click the CAP you want to display Click Properties The CAP Properties screen appears Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh Library 1 0 0 0 CAP car Folder 1 0 0 0 Properties car 0 1 08 gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 eh Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Size CAP Configuration Module VO or Storage
317. the lowest module in the rack these cells are not available Array targets Tape drives 96116 Revision KB 359 LTO Configurations LIO Configurations The following figures show LTO storage cell and tape drive locations FIGURE A 1 Base Module LTO Cells on page 361 shows a library with only a Base Module FIGURE A 2 LTO Cell Locations for Firmware Site Mapping on page 362 shows a library with a Base Module that has nine reserved cells one Drive Expansion Module and one Cartridge Expansion Module FIGURE A 3 LTO Cell Locations for SCSI Element Numbering Mapping on page 363 shows a library with a Base Module that has two reserved cells one Drive Expansion Module and one Cartridge Expansion Module The storage cell numbering begins with the first cell after the reserved cells in column 1 The figure shows two reserved cells but there could be more If the reserved cells are configured as storage cells the top cell row 1 would be 1 FIGURE A 4 LTO Cells for Back Wall of Cartridge Expansion Module on page 364 shows the cell capacity of a Cartridge Expansion Module according to which type of module is installed above and below it 360 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 LTO Configurations FIGURE A 1 Base Module LTO Cells i oo COLUMN ee 1 2 3 4 9 5 6 7 8 vzo 1 2 3 lt 4 5 6 lt T 8 L204_004 96116 Revision KB Append
318. the report on a selected printer Save to File Click to save the report to a designated comma separated text file csv extension Comma separated files can be opened by a variety of spreadsheet and database programs Help Click to display online help for the screen See Also m Partitions Reports Cartridge Cell and Media Summary m Partitions Reports Host Connections Summary m Partitions Reports Orphaned Cartridge Report a Partitions Reports Partition Summary 186 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Report Screens Partitions Reports Partition Summary Sample Screen Tools Help Partitions Instructions Step 1 Summary Step 2 Design Step 3 Commit Step 4 i Reports NOTE The reports in this menu reflect only the current partition definitions stored on the library Any changes to the partition definitions made in the Design tab will be reflected in the reports only after they are committed Partition Summary NA Partitions as of 4 30 08 3 16 PM re oe Media in Storage E Le Partition Partition Storage Storage Cells wi Drives CAPs Total ID Name Cells R Media Cells Media 1 Part1 36 7 19 44 2 Part 2 35 1 2 86 The Total Media column includes media currently found in CAPs drives and storage cells Print Save To File Description Displays summary information for all
319. these changes until you click Apply or Refresh on your screen Therefore the display you see on the SL Console may not reflect the actual saved library configuration at a given point in time For these reasons if you are making major modifications to the library configuration adding modules defining partitions etc it is important that you coordinate these changes with other library users Failure to do so could result in conflicts within the controller database 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 31 SL Console Reports SL Console Reports The SL Console library reports provide information on the library and its associated devices for example drives robots and CAPs events and tape cartridges You can use the reports to monitor library activity and identify potential problems In addition to displaying the reports on screen you can save the report data to a file which you can then print or include in e mail All report output is a static display of information sent from the library controller at the time the report is generated The SL Console does not update the information dynamically unless you explicitly select the Update button on the Options bar Note Running multiple instances of the standalone SL Console or Web launched SL Console on the same PC or workstation can cause problems such as inconsistent data on reports It is recommended that only one user at a time produce SL Console r
320. tion a Partition n gold Resource is allocated to the selected partition partition n a Other Partitions red Resource is allocated to another partition and therefore NOT available to the selected partition Cartridge cartridge icon Resource contains a tape cartridge Library Map Graphical representation of the current library configuration Initial display for the current SL Console login session is from the library controller database then the display reflects data from the SL Console partition workspace as you modify partition configurations The display includes the following information a Types of modules installed in the library Base Module drive module storage module a Numeric module ID 1 5 a Media configuration for each module mixed media or LTO only a Location of all resources storage cells tape drives CAP cells within the library Note Move the cursor over any resource to display a tooltip of detailed information about the cell or drive its partition assignment and the identity of any resident cartridge Note If no partition IDs have been defined the library map is display only Use the library map to modify the boundaries of the selected partition Depending on whether you have clicked the Add or Remove radio button all selected resources are either added to or removed from the partition Depending on your choice in the Select by field you can perform any of the following ac
321. tion Each partition can have up to nine host partition connections each one having a unique LUN This screen is a popup that appears when you click Add Connection on the Partitions Summary Step 2 screen Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Connections n Display only Partition ID of the selected partition Initiator WWPN Required World Wide Port Name of the host bus adapter HBA Sixteen hexadecimal digits You can enter upper or lower case hex digits but the display is always shown in all upper case Target Port Display only Port number of the SL500 library controller This entry is always 0 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 149 Partition Summary Screens LUN Required Logical unit number of the library Partition on the host This entry must be unique on the host You can create up to nine unique LUNs per partition Note Each initiator connected to the library must have one library partition assigned to LUN 0 When you verify or commit partition configuration changes the SL Console w
322. tions i aL E PRIVATE PUBLIC L204_008 1 Private Ethernet port is for future use 2 Eject OK hot swappable LED when on indicates that the RLC card can be removed See note below 3 Public Ethernet port is for remote service access SL Console and SNMP future 4 Fault LED indicates that the controller has detected a problem 5 Reserved for future use 6 Standby LED when lit indicates the RLC card when two RLC cards are installed is in standby mode See note below 7 CLI port is an RJ 45 serial port for service representatives 8 Active LED when lit indicates this RLC card is active if two RLC cards are installed If only one card is installed the LED is always on See note below Note Currently only one RLC card is available 24 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Tape Management Software Tape Management Software The tape management software provides the instructions to perform tape read and write operations and robotic move operations When the library is in automated mode these operations occur without manual intervention The software determines where the cartridge is located by accessing audit data uploaded from the library The software then allocates the tape drive to receive the cartridge For command descriptions and instructions refer to your software publications 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 25 Tape Management So
323. tions a Select by cell Select individual or groups of resources Resources in a partition do not need to be adjacent to one another To select an individual resource double click it To select a rectangular group of resources click the cell or drive at one corner of the rectangle and then click the cell or drive diagonally opposite a Select by side Select an entire side within a module except the CAP Sides in a partition do not need to be adjacent to one another To select one side of a library module click any resource in that side a Select by module Select an entire module except the CAP Modules in a partition do not have to be adjacent to one another To select a library module click any resource in that module 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 163 Partition Design and Commit Screens Buttons Verify Results Click to verify Partition configuration changes you have made during this SL Console login session The Tools gt Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results popup appears indicating whether there are any orphaned cartridges or other errors in the current partition configuration Note This procedure verifies only one partition at a time If you need to verify multiple partitions you must repeat this procedure separately for each partition Note This verification is performed on the current partition configuration in the SL Console partition workspace only It d
324. tions Bar click Apply The boundaries of the selected partition are verified including the locations of all tape cartridges The Confirm Apply popup appears indicating whether there are any orphaned cartridges or other problems in the current partition configuration confirm appi x x Warnings Found Some WVVPNs will need re audit Some hosts do not employ LUN 0 Cartridge data may be lost Do you want to commit these changes Yes No Details gt gt 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 117 Partition Configuration Tasks 4 o display detailed warning messages explaining the reasons for any orphaned cartridges click Details You can use the Details button to toggle between the expanded and collapsed views of the warning messages Confirm Apply xi x Warnings Found Some WVVPNs will need re audit Some hosts do not employ LUN 0 Cartridge data may be lost Print Save The following hosts will need to be reaudited 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set 12 34 56 78 90 12 34 56 The following orphaned cartridges were found v Module Row _ Column Cause Vol Ser Explanation 1 6 8 From 0 To 2 P 2301L2 Magically appeared to host 2 1 4 8 From 0 To 1 ENO0619L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 3 8 From 07To 1 EN1005L1 Magically appeared to host 1 1 4 7 From 2
325. tition and only allocated cells can be removed You can define partition boundaries in any of the following ways m Select individual cells or rectangular groups of cells to add or remove from a partition Cells or cell groups do not have to be contiguous m Select an entire module side to add or remove from a partition Sides do not have to be contiguous m Select an entire module to add or remove from a partition Modules do not have to be contiguous Sample Partition Configuration FIGURE 5 1 on page 97 shows a sample SL500 library partition configuration In this example there are three defined partitions m Partition 1 m Partition 2 96 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Planning m Partition 6 Tools Help Partitions Verify Refresh Instructions Step 1 Summary Step2 Design Step3 Commit Step 4 Reports Partition Left Side Wall Rear Side Wall Right Side Wall Select by cet Base Module1 LTO Add Remove Totals For Partition 1 Allocated Storage Cells 27 Allocated Drives 1 Allocated CAP Cells 2 Available Totals Unallocated Storage Cells 19 Unallocated Drives 0 Unallocated CAP Cells 1 UU LUUUUUUL HP Drive Module2 LTO Legend Not Accessible C unallocated HGS Partition 1 HES other Partitions Cartridge Partition 6 Module 2 row 2 col 9 Cartridge Empty FIGURE 5 1 Library Partition Example
326. tivation Keys have been installed reboot the library for the Keys to be enabled 8 You must reboot the library in order for the new activation file features to be activated Click the Reboot button in the Options Bar See Reboot the Library on page 296 for detailed instructions 9 You can verify that the activation file has been installed and activated successfully by displaying the current activation files See Display Current Hardware Activation Files on page 75 for details 10 Depending on the features included in the hardware activation file you may need to perform additional tasks in order to use the new features m See Increasing Activated Capacity on page 91 for special considerations that apply when you install a hardware activation file that adds activated capacity to the library m See Installing the Partitioning Feature on page 95 for special considerations that apply when you install a hardware activation file with the Partitioning feature 74 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Hardware Activation File Tasks v Display Current Hardware Activation Files Use this procedure to display the features currently activated on the library you are logged in to 1 Select Tools gt Hardware Activation and click the Current Hardware Activation Keys tab The Current Activation Keys screen appears listing the currently activated features See Hardware Activation gt Current Hardwa
327. tivation files or one FullDEM activation file 96116 Revision KB 87 Capacity on Demand Features and Restrictions a FullCEM Activates all storage cells in a Cartridge Expansion Module CEM m After installing additional activated capacity you need to reboot the library Once verified by the library controller the additional storage cells are available for use m Storage capacity is incremental Total activated capacity is equal to the sum of the capacities specified in each hardware activation file installed and activated on the library m The order that capacity activation files are installed is not significant that is it does not need to match the order of the modules in the SL500 frame Terminology The following terms are used to describe library capacity management m Physical or installed capacity The number of storage cells physically present in the library m Activated capacity The number of storage cells the library is activated to use This cannot exceed the installed capacity Planning Library Capacity The SL500 does not support gaps in activated capacity all storage cells must be contiguous This has the following effects on capacity planning You can begin adding activated capacity to a module only if the module directly above it is activated at full capacity Example Base Module DEM The Base Module must be activated at full capacity before you can begin adding activated capacity to the DEM
328. to a comma separated file 170 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partition Design and Commit Screens Caution Information in the SL Console partition workspace is saved to the library controller database only through the Commit Step 4 screen If your SL Console session ends or you refresh the workspace data before you have committed your updates through the Commit Step 4 screen you will lose any partition changes you have made through the Summary Step 2 and Design Step 3 screens and all associated popups Screen Fields Note The screen fields are the same as those displayed in the Partitions Design Step 3 Verify Results popup Warnings found Display only Summary error messages regarding the partition configuration The following hosts will need re audited Display only World Wide Port Names WWPNs of any hosts that should re audit their library partition This may be because library resources have been deleted from the partition The following hosts do not have Lun 0 set Display only World Wide Port Names WWPNs of any hosts that have not defined any library partitions as LUN 0 on the host The following orphaned cartridges were found Display only Detailed information regarding all orphaned cartridges in the current partition configuration Includes module row and columnlocation of the cartridge cartridge volume serial number VOLID and probable causes and explanations
329. to a partition are treated as common A common CAP is a shared library resource Each host must select a common CAP to use it and must release the CAP when done to make it available to other hosts No other host can access the CAP until the first host has completed the operation and released the CAP For additional details see CAP Operations on page 102 Split CAP In a split CAP the cells in the CAP are allocated to one or more partitions Each individual CAP cell can be allocated to one partition only Cells in a split CAP can be allocated in any of the following ways m All cells can be allocated to one partition m All cells can be distributed among multiple partitions For example in an eight cell CAP two cells could be allocated to Partition 1 one cell to Partition 2 and the remaining cells to Partition 3 m Some cells can be allocated to one partition and the remainder left unallocated or common For example in an eight cell CAP five cells could be allocated to Partition 3 and the remaining cells left common When configuring a split CAP you must plan carefully for anticipated CAP usage A partition with allocated CAP cells can use the cells allocated to it only It cannot use CAP cells allocated to other partitions nor can it use common CAP cells CAP Operations In a partitioned library it is recommended that you assign partitions to the CAP Open button on the library control panel prior to pressing the button
330. to be used for a total of 42 This conversion bill is for customers who want only the base unit and do not expect to order an expansion module The CAP cells can also be configured as storage cells m Drive expansion modules DEMs and Cartridge Expansion Modules CEMs can be added to a standard rack to accommodate various storage cell and tape drive configurations Note You must have a 42 cartridge capacity base unit before you can order an expansion module See Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications for detailed diagrams and dimensions Mixed Media Library Internal Addressing The numbering scheme uses the library module row and column scheme Four integers are used to represent the cartridge and tape drive slots as viewed from the front of the library 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 7 Library with Mixed Media Storage Cells 1 Library number always 0 Library module number 1 top of rack through 5 bottom of rack Row number 1 through 8 Base Module or 1 through 10 expansion module e WO N Column number 1 through 9 for Base Module and Drive Expansion Module 1 through 11 for Cartridge Expansion Module See Mixed Media Storage Cell and Drive Capacities on page 8 for more information Mixed Media Storage Cell and Drive Capacities Note Your software might conflict with the following information Refer to your software publication for unique informat
331. to open the CAPs 102 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Partitions and CAPs Once you have assigned partitions to the CAP Open button only CAPs containing cells that are accessible to those partitions will open Depending on how your library s CAPs are configured this operation may expose CAP cells that are not accessible to the selected partitions As a safeguard however CAPs that contain only inaccessible cells and CAPs with cartridges in inaccessible cells do not open For detailed instructions see Enter Cartridges Into a Partitioned Library on page 135 and Eject Cartridges From a Partitioned Library on page 138 96116 Revision KB Chapter 5 Library Partitioning 103 Partitioning Process Partitioning Process Note Starting with SL500 firmware version 1300 and SL Console version FRS_4 00 library partitioning upgrades must be installed through the SL500 hardware activation utility Partitioning established on a library prior to version 1300 is retained permanently See Hardware Activation Files for details Partition Configuration Process When configuring library partitions for the first time it is recommended that you use the library partition screens in the following sequence 1 Instructions Step 1 Review summary instructions for the partition configuration process 2 Summary Step 2 Display summary partition configuration and host partition connection inform
332. topped Completed Moves 0 Number of sequences running 0 322 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks 4 From the Defined Sequences section click a diagnostic move and then click Open The Monitor window is activated Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 Diag Load Code Activate Code Selffest RewMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 DriveDiagMove1 Spool File Resume Sequence N Pause Sequence Stop Sequence Clear Output Window Spooling Status false State Stopped Health OK Completed Moves 0 10 You can repeat this step to open multiple moves as long as the target and pool address ranges for the moves do not overlap A monitor window is displayed for each move you open 5 From each monitor window select File gt Start Sequence to start the move 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 323 Robot Utility Tasks v Monitor and Control Open Diagnostic Moves Use this procedure to control and monitor the status of one or more open diagnostic moves 1 See Start a Diagnostic Move on page 322 for instructions on starting one or more diagnostic moves 2 Click the Monitor tab The Monitor screen appears with one monitor window for each open move Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot Library 1 0 0
333. total allocation does not exceed the new activated capacity 96116 Revision KB Chapter 4 Capacityon Demand 91 Implementing Changes to Activated Capacity a If after capacity has been decreased the total number of cells allocated to all partitions is still less than the new activated capacity you do not need to reconfigure the partitions Host Notification of Capacity Changes When storage capacity is added or removed the library controller notifies all affected hosts according to their interface requirements SCSI hosts are notified by a Mode Parameters Changed unit attention The host must re audit the library to determine the specific configuration changes See the appropriate tape management software documentation for detailed procedures and commands 92 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 5 Library Partitioning Note Starting with SL500 firmware version 1300 and SL Console version FRS_4 00 library partitioning upgrades must be installed through the SL500 hardware activation utility Partitioning established on a library prior to version 1300 is retained permanently See Hardware Activation Files for details Library partitioning allows sections of the SL500 library to be assigned for exclusive use by specified hosts For example you can configure one group of storage cells and drives to be used only for Veritas operations and another group only for Tivoli operatio
334. total seconds in time interval Mounts Display only Total number of cartridge mounts initiated during the selected time period Dismounts Display only Total number of cartridge dismounts initiated during the selected time period Moves Display only Total number of cartridge moves from one storage cell to another that were initiated during the selected time period CAP Enters Display only Total number of cartridge moves from a CAP cell to a storage cell that were initiated during the selected time period CAP Ejects Display only Total number of cartridge moves from a storage cell to a CAP cell that were initiated during the selected time period 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library Management 209 Library Management Tasks 210 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 CHAPTER 7 CAP Management CAP Operations Note This section describes general CAP activities applying to all libraries For information specific to CAP activities in partitioned libraries see Partitions and CAPs on page 102 CAPs cartridge access ports allow a library operator to enter or eject cartridges to or from the library You can use the CAPs only when the library is in automated mode The CAP in the Base Module has one five cell magazine the CAP in the Drive Expansion Module has two five cell magazines Optionally the CAP cells can be configured for cartridge storage instead of enter and eject operation
335. tridges properly or else you might damage the Robot or the drive or cause the library to stop operating Use only cartridges designed for the drives in your library 7 Grip the handle and slide the magazine back into the CAP 8 Close the CAP door making sure that the door is securely latched The Robot systematically moves each cleaning and diagnostic cartridge from the CAP to an empty reserved cell 9 Monitor the Import Export Console to verify the status of the import operation The Operation completed status indicates that the import cartridge operation is completed 10 After the import operation is complete the Robot audits the CAP To view a list of cleaning and diagnostic cartridges in the reserved cells see Display Cleaning Cartridges on page 260 Note If you want to import cleaning and diagnostic cartridges into reserved cells one cartridge at a time use the Recovery Move diagnostic utility See Move a Cartridge From a Specified Location on page 246 96116 Revision KB Chapter 10 Drive Cleaning 257 Drive Cleaning Tasks v Eject Cleaning or Diagnostic Cartridges Use this procedure to eject expired cleaning or diagnostic cartridges through the CAP Note Before beginning this procedure verify that the CAP cells are empty 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Expand the CAP Folder highlight the CAP and then select the Import Export tab Tools Help Diagnostics Start
336. tures Safety Features The following subsections describe the safety features that are incorporated into the library Cards and Power Supply The RLC card SCSI MPW RLW or Fibre Channel MPU2 interface card and the power supply are housed inside protective modules to prevent you from coming into contact with hazardous voltages and sensitive electronics Robotics The software parks the robot by retracting it into the robotics unit module before the front door can be opened to prevent the robot from being damaged When the front door is opened power is removed from the robot Front Door The front door must be opened with a key to ensure that the data is secure If the door is not fully closed a sensor relays the condition to the software and the robot remains disabled 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 23 Interfaces Interfaces The major interfaces are m Library control path support for LVD SCSI or SCSI over Fibre Channel Data path for a single port SCSI or dual port Fibre Channel tape drive m Cartridge access ports and sensors for indicating a door open or closed condition a Front door opened button on keypad key for opening door sensor LED that indicates door is closed and latched m Public 100BaseT Ethernet Port for the StorageTek Library Console SL Console and remote service access see FIGURE 1 6 and StorageTek Library Console on page 27 FIGURE 1 6 Library Interfaces Loca
337. u can minimize maximize or resize the Help screen to accommodate your needs m You can resize the left and right panels of the Help screen by clicking the border between them and dragging it left or right Most topics include a Related Topics button at the bottom of the page Click on this button to display and navigate to help topics containing related information 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 35 Web launched SL Console Web launched SL Console The Web launched SL Console is a standard feature of the library It enables the SL Console to be installed on a centralized Web server Individual clients can then use a supported Web browser to download the Web launched SL Console Using the Web launched SL Console you can connect to any library for which you have a valid user ID The Web launched SL Console is delivered to clients as a Java Web Start process which executes outside the browser Security Considerations The Web launched SL Console software is digitally signed which guarantees that it has been issued by Oracle Corporation and has not been altered or corrupted since it was created As a Java Web Start process the Web launched SL Console includes the security features provided by the Java 2 platform The customer is responsible for implementing all appropriate additional security systems including firewalls user access etc Client Requirements You can download the Web launched SL C
338. ugh a blind mate connector Note If a slot does not contain a tape drive a vacancy plate must be installed over the slot 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 15 Tape Drives and Cartridges LTO Tape Drives and Cartridges Note LTO technology was developed by IBM Hewlett Packard and Seagate LTO is an open format technology which means that users have multiple sources of product and media This section discusses media compatibility and cartridge labels For all other tape drive and media information such as specifications refer to m The specific vender Web site m http www sun com storagetek index jsp For best results match the cartridges with the specific drive type for example use LTO 2 cartridges in Gen 2 drives The following table lists the compatibility issues among the various LTO cartridges and tape drives Although SL500 does not support Gen 1 drives the column is listed for you to consider if you need to migrate your data from older types of cartridges to newer ones TABLE 1 8 LTO Media Tape Drive Compatibility Media Label Gen 1 Drive Gen 2 Drive Gen 3 Drive Gen 4 Drive LTO 1 L1 Read and write Read and write Read only Non applicable LTO 2 L2 Non applicable Read and write Read and Read only write LTO 3 L3 Non applicable Non applicable Read and Read and write write LTO 4 L4 Non applicable Non applicable Non Read and applicable write WORM LT Non applicable
339. ule tab Tools Help System Detail Apply Refresh ary 1 U U 0 gt car Folder 1 0 0 0 gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Module Information L M R C Address Description 1 1 0 0 Base multi media drive CAP 1 2 0 0 8U multi media storage CAP between drives 1 3 0 0 8U multi media drive CAP last 96116 Revision KB Chapter 6 Library Management 205 Library Management Tasks v Display Library SCSI Configuration View the configuration of the library SCSI ports 1 Select Tools gt System Detail and click the Library folder 2 Click the Properties tab and then the SCSI tab The SCSI Port screen is displayed ols Help System Detail Library 1 0 0 0 Apply Refresh car Folder 1 0 0 Drive Folder 1 0 0 7 Properties Statistics AutoClean SNMP General Library Controller Module SCSI Robot Folder1 0 SCSI Ports A Maximum Available Ports ctivated Ports SCSI Port Statuses Port Number Health State Access State Topology Port Speed Loop ID FC WWN Port Name FC WN Node Name 1 lAvailable Unavailable Unknown 0Gbit Unknown 500104f0007a82ee 500104f0007a82ed il gt Sim SL500 comm Status UserID root Library green11 central sun com 206 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Ma
340. unction tabs Options bar Work area 96116 Revision KB Identifies the available functions for a screen Location of buttons related to the screen for example Apply Refresh Print Always includes the SL Console Help button See Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database on page 30 for details on using the Apply and Refresh buttons Location of the screen data Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 29 SL Console Screen Display Component Name Description 6 Library health indicator Identifies the library to which the SL Console is connected and displays a graphical representation of the library health 7 UserID indicator Displays the user ID currently logged in to the SL Console 8 Server communication Displays a graphical heartbeat monitor indicating the state of health indicator server communication health 9 Device tree Lists the devices included in the library Modifying the Screen Layout Note This feature is available starting with SL Console version FRS_3 30 It is available on selected screens only You can modify the layout and display of selected SL Console screens as follows Display Option Instructions Sort the display by any Click the heading of the column you want to sort by column Initially the sort is in ascending order Click the heading again to switch between ascending and descending order Arrange the columns Click and drag a column heading horizontall
341. ut Select the partition for which you want to enter or eject cartridges You can select only one partition at a time from this table Options are a 1 8 Click the radio button to select the partition a None Common only Click the radio button to de select all partitions in this table This indicates that the enter or eject operation does not involve any partitions with access to common CAP cells Partitions with split CAP configuration All partitions with access to split CAP cells are displayed in this table Select the partitions for which you want to enter or eject cartridges You can select more than one partition at a time from this table Clearing all checkboxes indicates that the enter or eject operation does not involve any partitions with allocated CAP cells Options are a 1 8 Click the checkbox to select the partition clear the checkbox to de select the partition a All Split only Click the checkbox to select all partitions in this table Buttons Apply Click to update the library controller database with the current settings from this screen The CAP Confirm popup appears prompting you to confirm the update Refresh Click to refresh the SL Console partition workspace with current data from the library controller database All uncommitted partition changes you have made during this SL Console login session will be discarded The Partition Refresh popup appears prompting you to confirm the refresh Help
342. ve 0 3 4 9 Interface Type Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Drive Configuration THE DRIVE MUST BE IN A CONFIGURABLE STATE LVD Target ID h4 World Wide Name Node Port A World Wide Name Port A Enabled Port A Loop ID use 126 for soft addressing Port A Speed GB Port A Link Status Port B World Wide Name Port B Enabled Port B Loop ID use 126 for soft addressing Port B Speed GB Port B Link Status 4 Set the Port A Enabled or Port B Enabled status as follows m True Turns on the port m False Turns off the port the communication channel between the host software and the drive is disabled 5 The network software automatically configures the Port A or B address This is called soft mode addressing 222 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Drive Management Tasks v Display Current Drive Mappings Note This feature is available starting with SL500 firmware version 1393 and SL Console version FRS_4 50 The Current Drive Mapping report lists the library internal address and drive serial number currently assigned to each physical drive slot in the library By default the report is sorted in drive slot order Optionally you can change the sort order and rearrange and resize the columns See Modifying the Screen Layout on page 30 1 Select Tools gt Reports 2 Expand the Statistics folder and click Drive Mapping Current
343. ve Manage screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 gt CAP Folder1000 i Load Code Activate Code Selffest RevwrMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Manage Monitor Sequence Monitor Console Defined Sequences DriveDiagMove 1 Drive Min Min Min Min lt gt Max Max Max Max Storage S State Stopped CompletedMoves 0 Number of sequences running 0 320 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Robot Utility Tasks 4 Click the diagnostic move you want to save and then click the Save button in the Options Bar The Save popup appears x Save In exerciser lr w e BR a drives xml File Name Files of Type XML Document xml lv Save Cancel 5 Browse to the directory where you want to save the file In the File Name field enter the file name 6 Click Save The data is saved to the specified file Following is a sample excerpt lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt java version 1 5 0_11 class java beans XMLDecoder gt lt object class com stortek ats elib opel model SequenceBeanList gt lt String gt FRS 4 10 lt string gt lt string gt SL500 lt string gt lt void method add gt lt object class com stortek ats elib opel model SequenceBeanList Seque
344. verlap Modify Modify options for a This diagnostic move routine must not be open or if open diagnostic move must be in a Stopped state Remove Remove a diagnostic move This diagnostic move routine must not be open Copy Copy an existing diagnostic Copy a diagnostic move definition make changes if move necessary and assign a different name 5 To manage the diagnostic moves currently open see Monitor and Control Open Diagnostic Moves on page 324 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 319 Robot Utility Tasks v Save a Diagnostic Move to a File Use this procedure to save a defined diagnostic move to a local file on your workstation or PC The file is saved as a JavaBean component represented as an XML 1 0 document xm1 Possible uses for the saved file are m Can be used to restore a move that has been deleted from the library m Can be copied to a different library for use there 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics 2 Click the Library folder on the device tree The Library screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Save Restore Reboot VA Library 1 0 0 0 Libray gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code Audit SetfTest RcvrMove TransferFile gt Drive Folder1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 Monitor Monitor Console 3 Click the DiagMove tab and then the Manage tab The Diagnostic Mo
345. w gt Tile Vertical Stack the event monitors Window gt Cascade 288 SL500 Users Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Library Utility Tasks Library Utility Tasks Task Page Perform a Non Disruptive Library Self Test 290 Perform a Disruptive Library Self Test 293 Reboot the Library 296 Download Code to the Library Controller 298 Activate Code on the Library Controller 300 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 289 Library Utility Tasks v Perform a Non Disruptive Library Self Test Use this procedure to perform a non disruptive library self test which can be used to help diagnose operational problems with the library In order for the test to run completely the proper diagnostic cartridges for library drives must be present in the library To verify this see List Library Cartridges on page 240 1 Select Tools gt Diagnostics and click the Library folder 2 Click the SelfTest tab The Self Test screen appears Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 Library gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMove Load Code Activate Code gt Drive Folder 1 0 0 0 Robot Folder 1 0 0 0 TransferFile Select a mode and click Run button to initiate self test Mode honosne 7 Diagnostic Console 3 In the Mode pull down select Non Disruptive Tools Help Diagnostics Run Reboot Library 1 0 0 0 gt CAP Folder 1 0 0 0 DiagMov
346. write Read only Read only No action No action No action No action Read and write Note DLT S4 drives are supported with library firmware 1126 and later Note SDLT600 and DLT S4 tape drives with appropriate firmware can accept cartridges with the WORM feature The WORM write once read many times feature prevents the user from altering or erasing information from the tape For more information go to the Quantum Web site and do a search on DLTICE Note The WORM feature cartridge must be unformatted native a blank native a native with one filemark and an EOD See Cartridge Information on page 375 for more specific information about cartridges 96116 Revision KB Chapter 1 SL500 Introduction 17 Cartridge Access Ports Cartridge Access Ports The cartridge access ports CAPs can be used to add cartridges to the library or remove cartridges from the library without interrupting normal robotic operation m The CAP in the Base Module has one five cell magazine m The CAP in the Drive Expansion Module has two five cell magazines Although the CAPs are not physically connected they are logically connected If any of the CAPs are open the CAP LED on the keypad will be on alerting the operator to take action to close the CAP If all of the CAPs are closed the CAP LED will be off You can use the keypad on the robotics unit to issue a command for the robot to unlock the CAP The CAP has two
347. xx 96116 Revision KB xxiii Related Documentation Tape Drive Documentation Hewlett Packard Ultrium Tape Drive Manual IBM Ultrium Tape Drive Manual T10000 Tape Drive Installation Manual T10000 Tape Drive Service Manual T10000 Virtual Operator s Panel User s Guide for Service Representatives T9840 Tape Drive User s Reference Manual T9x40 Tape Drive Installation Manual T9x40 Tape Drive Service Reference Manual Seagate Ultrium Tape Drive Product Manual Super DLT600 Product Manual T9840 Tape Drive User s Reference Manual T9940 Tape Drive Operator s Guide Tape Management Software Publications Part Number CD included with drive CD included with drive 96173 96175 96180 95739 95879 95740 CD included with drive CD included with drive 95739 95989 Part Number Automated Cartridge System Library Software ACSLS ACSLS Administrator s Guide ACSLS Messages ACSLS Quick Reference Host Software Component HSC MVS Publications HSC Configuration Guide HSC Messages and Codes Guide HSC Operator s Guide HSC Reference Summary Guide HSC System Programmer s Guide Other Publications Product Regulatory and Safety Compliance Manual American National Standard Dictionary for Information Processing Systems American National Standard Magnetic Tape and Cartridge for Information Interchange Magnetic Tape Labels and File Structure for Information Interchange SCSI 3 Parallel Interface SP
348. y on page 296 for detailed instructions The reboot process begins and a popup appears indicating that your SL Console session will be terminated 10 Click OK to terminate the SL Console session You are logged off the library 11 When the library initialization has completed you can log in again to the library through the SL Console login screen The SL Console gets all library configuration data from the library controller Therefore you should be careful when logging in to the SL Console before the library has fully initialized You may see warnings that configuration data is not yet available in which case you need to exit and log in again at a later time Additionally if a library audit is performed as part of initialization until the audit is complete any configuration data displayed may not be completely up to date and accurate 96116 Revision KB Chapter 12 SL Console Diagnostics and Utilities 301 Audit Tasks Audit Tasks Task Page Audit the Entire Library 303 Audit a Range of Cells 305 Perform a Verified Audit 307 302 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Audit Tasks v Audit the Entire Library During this audit the Robot visits all the storage cells catalogs the VOLIDs and locations and updates the library controller database Note Although this audit is a background process and does not interrupt library operations it does require sharing of Robot resources Therefore
349. y a new web application archive war file Virtual Server URI Target Directory Web Application Location JSP Pre compilation 0129684 louisville stortek com fopel web appiC1 29684 louisville stortek com opel Specify a package file to upload to the Web Server C SLC_WebLaunch opel war Browse Specify a package file that must be accessible from the server I Enabled Enabling this directive will allow all the JSPs present in the web application to be pre compiled to improve performance The server update begins and screen with a progress bar is displayed 96116 Revision KB Appendix C Web launched SL Console Server 411 Server Installation and Management 7 On the Web Applications screen click the Deployment Pending link in the upper right corner Us admin rc Sun Java System Web Server Configurations C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Servers C129684 louisville stortek com Se cee Web Application Updated Successfully C129684 louisville stortek com Virtual Server Web Applications This page lets you add web applications to the virtual server Web applications are added as web archive war files After adding the web application you need to deploy the configuration to propagate the added web applications to the instances The page also allows you to set single signon properties Single Signon x Web Applications Single Signon Single Signon Enabl
350. y assy 4 5 kg 9 9 1b SDLT LVD tape drive and tray assy 4 2 kg 9 3 1b SDLT FC tape drive and tray assy 4 1 kg 9 0 Ib DLT S4 tape drive and tray assy 3 88 kg 8 6 lb Tape drive tray assy without tape drive 1 5 kg 3 4 lb LTO Ultrium cartridge 221 0 g 7 8 oz Library Environment The following table lists the library environment specifications TABLE A 3 Library Environment Specifications Measurements Item Operating Storage Transporting T i 10 to 40 C 10 to 40 C 40 to 60 C i ete 50 to 104 F 50 to 104 F 40 to 140 EF Humidity 20 to 80 10 to 95 10 to 95 Wet bulb maximum 29 2 C 35 C 35 C noncondensing 84 5 F 95 F 95 F Altitude 76 to 3 048 m 250 to 10 000 ft 96116 Revision KB Appendix A SL500 Wall Diagrams and Specifications 373 Specifications Power Specifications The following tables list power specifications for the modules and tape drives TABLE A 4 Power for Library Without Tape Drives Input voltage 100 240 VAC single phase Frequency 50 60 Hz Maximum library power consumption A T A aA Maximum heat output 614 Btu hr Voltage amperes 180 VA TABLE A 5 Power for Base Unit and Two LTO Tape Drives Two LTO Tape Drives Input power Input voltage amperes 219 Watts 226 voltage amperes Input current 100 VAC 2 3 amperes Input current 120 VAC 1 9 amperes Input current 240 VAC 0 9 amper
351. y to any in any order position in the heading row Resize the columns Click the border of the column heading and drag it left or right to change the column width Synchronizing the Display With the Controller Database Logging In The SL Console gets all library configuration data from the library controller Therefore you should be careful when logging in to the SL Console before the library has fully initialized You may see warnings that configuration data is not yet available in which case you need to exit and log in again at a later time Additionally if a library audit is performed as part of initialization until the audit is complete any configuration data displayed may not be completely up to date and accurate Making Library Configuration Updates When you first bring up an SL Console screen the display reflects the most recently saved data from the library controller database If you use the screen to modify the library contents or configuration your changes do not update the controller database until you commit your changes by clicking the Apply button Multiple users can access the library at the same time using the SL Console command line interface and various 30 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 SL Console Screen Display host applications to make their own changes to the library contents and configuration If other users make changes and apply them to the controller database you will not see
352. you whether you want to replace the file 96116 Revision KB Chapter 2 StorageTek Library Console 61 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks Task Page Download the Standalone SL Console Installer 63 Install the Standalone SL Console 64 62 SL500 User s Guide June 2010 Revision KB 96116 Standalone SL Console Installation Tasks v Download the Standalone SL Console Installer Use this procedure to download the standalone SL Console installer program from the Oracle download site and initiate it on your PC or workstation Note Your Oracle CSE may have performed this procedure for you during library installation Note You must have a valid login ID and password for the download site you are using Contact your Oracle support representative for assistance 1 Start a Web browser on your PC or workstation 2 In the Address or Location Bar enter the URL of the appropriate Oracle download site See Installation Requirements on page 38 for details Log in to the Oracle download site using your assigned login ID and password Navigate to the standalone SL Console installer file Select the SL Console code level you want an a A Q Select the appropriate installer file for your platform m Microsoft Windows SLConsole Windows exe m Oracle Sun Solaris SuCconsole Solaris bin 7 Save the file to your PC or workstation Note

StorageTek SL500 User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents